Yamaha V96i El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: V96i

Categoría: Mezcladores de audio

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Este manual también es adecuado para

01V96

Owner’s Manual

Keep This Manual For Future Reference.

2 Contents

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Contents

PRECAUTIONS ...................................5

Welcome .......................................... 7

Package Contents ......................................... 7

About the utility software ........................... 7

Firmware updates ........................................ 8

About this Owner’s Manual ....................... 8

Conventions Used in this Manual ............. 8

Control Surface & Rear Panel .......... 9

Control Surface ............................................ 9

Rear Panel ................................................... 16

Installing an Optional Card ..................... 18

Operating Basics ............................ 19

About the Display ...................................... 19

Selecting Display Pages ............................. 20

Display Interface ........................................ 20

Selecting Layers .......................................... 21

Selecting Channels ..................................... 22

Selecting Fader Modes .............................. 22

Metering ...................................................... 23

Connections and Setup ................. 25

Connections ................................................ 25

Wordclock Connections and Settings .... 27

Input and Output Patching ...................... 29

Tutorial .......................................... 31

Input and Output Patching ...................... 31

Setting the Input Levels ............................ 32

Pairing Channels ........................................ 33

Setting the Routing .................................... 33

EQ’ing the Input Signals ........................... 35

Using the EQ Library ................................ 36

Compressing the Input Signals ................ 37

Using the Internal Effects ......................... 38

Recording to DAW Software via

the USB Port ........................................... 39

Adjusting the Monitor Levels from

the DAW .................................................. 41

Using Scene Memories .............................. 42

Changing the Channel Names ................. 43

Creating a Custom Layer by Combining

Channels (User Assignable Layer) ....... 44

Using the Oscillator .................................. 45

Using the User Defined Keys ................... 46

Using Operation Lock ............................... 47

Initializing .................................................. 48

Troubleshooting ............................ 49

Error messages .............................. 51

Contents of the Reference

Manual ........................................... 54

Specifications ................................. 55

General Spec ............................................... 55

Libraries ...................................................... 60

Analog Input Spec ..................................... 61

Analog Output Specs ................................ 61

Digital Input Spec ...................................... 62

Digital Output Spec ................................... 62

I/O SLOT Spec ........................................... 63

MIDI/USB/WORD CLOCK I/O Spec .... 64

Dimensions ................................................ 64

Options .......................................... 65

Rack Mounting the 01V96i Using RK1

Rack Mount Kit ...................................... 65

Index .............................................. 66

01V96i Block Diagram.......End of Manual

01V96i Level Diagram.......End of Manual

The above warning is located on the rear

of the unit.

• Explanation of Graphical Symbols

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol

within an equilateral triangle is intended to

alert the user to the presence of uninsulated

“dangerous voltage” within the product’s

enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude

to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons.

The exclamation point within an equilateral

triangle is intended to alert the user to the

presence of important operating and mainte-

nance (servicing) instructions in the literature

accompanying the product.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

1 Read these instructions.

2 Keep these instructions.

3 Heed all warnings.

4 Follow all instructions.

5 Do not use this apparatus near water.

6 Clean only with dry cloth.

7 Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in

accordance with the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

8 Do not install near any heat sources such as

radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other appa-

ratus (including amplifiers) that produce heat.

9 Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polar-

ized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug

has two blades with one wider than the other. A

grounding type plug has two blades and a third

grounding prong. The wide blade or the third

prong are provided for your safety. If the pro-

vided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult

an electrician for replacement of the obsolete

outlet.

10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or

pinched particularly at plugs, convenience

receptacles, and the point where they exit from

the apparatus.

11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by

the manufacturer.

12 Use only with the cart, stand,

tripod, bracket, or table spec-

ified by the manufacturer, or

sold with the apparatus.

When a cart is used, use cau-

tion when moving the cart/

apparatus combination to

avoid injury from tip-over.

13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms

or when unused for long periods of time.

14 Refer all servicing to qualified service person-

nel. Servicing is required when the apparatus

has been damaged in any way, such as power-

supply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been

spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus,

the apparatus has been exposed to rain or mois-

ture, does not operate normally, or has been

dropped.

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF

ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE

COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE

PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO

QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

CAUTION

RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

WARNING

TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,

DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE.

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions con-

tained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not

expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by

the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/

or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s

supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation

instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC

authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the

requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital

devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reason-

able level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential

environment will not result in harmful interference with other elec-

tronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies

and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in

the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation

of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (class B)

not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If

this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be

determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to elimi-

nate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by

the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or

fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the

antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the

lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results,

please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of

product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please con-

tact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division,

6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by

Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED

IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance

with the following code:

GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not

correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in

your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be connected

to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the

safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN-and-YELLOW.

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the termi-

nal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

(3 wires)

ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning

må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte

batteri tilbage til leverandoren.

VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller

en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.

Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion.

VAROITUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo

ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty

paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.

(lithium caution)

NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS

• Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up.

• This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up.

• Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het

moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur of

gelieve dan contact op te nemen met de vertegenwoordiging van

Yamaha in uw land.

• For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the

end of life please consult your retailer or Yamaha representative

office in your country.

• Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.

• Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical

waste.

(lithium disposal)

This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material.

Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

(Perchlorate)

* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT

(DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)

Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America

Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif.

90620

Telephone : 714-522-9011

Type of Equipment : Digital Mixing Console

Model Name : 01V96i

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and

2) this device must accept any interference received including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired operation.

See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is sus-

pected.

(FCC DoC)

This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains

a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material

may be regulated due to environmental considerations.

For disposal information in the United States, refer to

the Electronic Industries Alliance web site:

www.eiae.org

(mercury)* This applies only to products distributed by

YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

PRECAUTIONS

PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING

* Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.

WARNING

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical

shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and

do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on

it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything

over it.

• Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device. The required voltage is

printed on the name plate of the device.

• Use only the supplied power cord/plug.

If you intend to use the device in an area other than in the one you purchased,

the included power cord may not be compatible. Please check with your Yamaha

dealer.

• Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have

accumulated on it.

• Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding

connection. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock.

• This device contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the device or

attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. If it should

appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected

by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions,

or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing

liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps

into the device, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from

the AC outlet. Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service

personnel.

• Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands.

• Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall

over and cause a fire.

• When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power

switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device

inspected by Yamaha service personnel.

- The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged.

- It emits unusual smells or smoke.

- Some object has been dropped into the device.

- There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the device.

• If this device should be dropped or damaged, immediately turn off the power

switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device

inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

CAUTION

Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage

to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

• When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always hold the

plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it.

• Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for

extended periods of time, or during electrical storms.

• Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall

over.

• Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the rear and sides to

prevent the internal temperature from becoming too high. In particular, do not

place the device on its side or upside down. Inadequate ventilation can result in

overheating, possibly causing damage to the device(s), or even fire.

• If mounting this device in an EIA-standard rack, leave the back of the rack open,

and keep the rack least 10 cm from the wall. If you mount this device in a rack

together with a device that tends to generate heat, such as a power amp, take

precautions to prevent heat from building up inside this device, for example by

leaving space between the devices and by installing ventilation panels.

• Do not hold the bottom of the device when transporting or moving it. In doing

so, you may pinch your hands under the device, and result in injury.

• Do not press the rear panel of the device against the wall. Doing so may cause

the plug to come in contact with the wall and detach from the power cord,

resulting in short circuiting, malfunction, or even fire.

• Do not place the device in a location where it may come into contact with

corrosive gases or salt air. Doing so may result in malfunction.

• Before moving the device, remove all connected cables.

• When setting up the device, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily

accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the

power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power

switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum

level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug

the power cord from the wall AC outlet.

Power supply/Power cord

Do not open

Water warning

Fire warning

If you notice any abnormality

Power supply/Power cord

Location

PA_en_1 1/2

• Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all devices.

Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume levels to

minimum.

• Remove the power plug from the AC outlet when cleaning the device.

• Do not insert your fingers or hands in any gaps or openings on the device

(vents, etc.).

• Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.) into any

gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.) If this happens, turn off the power

immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the

device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel.

• Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and avoid use

excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors.

• Do not use the headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable

volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience

any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician.

Notice

Please observe the following precautions to prevent this

device from malfunction or damage, and to avoid loss of

data.

• Do not use this device near another electrical product such as a television,

radio, stereo, or portable phone. Doing so may cause noise to be heard from this

device or from the television or radio.

• Do not use this device in locations exposed to direct sunlight (such as the

interior of a vehicle during the daytime), in locations of extremely high

temperature such as near a stove, in locations of extremely low temperature, or

in locations of excessive dust or heavy vibration. Doing so may cause the panel

of this device to deform, cause malfunctions in the internal components, or

cause operation to become unstable.

•

Do not place vinyl, plastic, or rubber items on this device. Doing so

may cause the panel to be discolored or disfigured.

• This device has a built-in backup battery. When you unplug the power cord from

the AC outlet, the internal data is retained. However, if the backup battery fully

discharges, this data will be lost. If the backup battery is running low, when you

turn on the device the display indicates “WARNING Low Battery!.” In this case,

immediately save the data to an external media using MIDI Bulk Dump, then

have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery.

The average life of the internal backup battery is approximately 5 years,

depending on operating conditions.

Information

* The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for

instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your device.

* The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the

trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

Always turn the power off when the device is not in use.

The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume

controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualified Yamaha service

personnel about replacing defective components.

(weee_eu)

Connections

Maintenance

Handling caution

Precautions for care and handling

Backup battery

Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or

modifications to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed.

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old

Equipment

This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or

accompanying documents means that used electrical

and electronic products should not be mixed with

general household waste.

For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old

products, please take them to applicable collection

points, in accordance with your national legislation and

the Directives 2002/96/EC.

By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable

resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the

environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling.

For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please

contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale

where you purchased the items.

[For business users in the European Union]

If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your

dealer or supplier for further information.

[Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European

Union]

This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these

items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct

method of disposal.

PA_en_1 2/2

Welcome 7

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Welcome

Thank you for choosing the Yamaha 01V96i Digital

Mixing Console.

The compact 01V96i Digital Console features

24-bit/96 kHz digital audio processing without com-

promise, as well as 40-channel simultaneous mixing.

The 01V96i covers a broad range of needs and applica-

tions including multi-track recording, 2-channel mix-

down, and surround sound production.

Package Contents

•Power cord

•Owner’s manual (this document)

• CUBASE AI DOWNLOAD INFORMATION

(printed)

About the utility software

The provided utility software allows you to use the

01V96i connected with your computer.

■ Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver

This is driver software for connecting the 01V96i to

your computer. Installing it in your computer will allow

audio/MIDI communication to occur.

■ 01V96i Editor

This is software that allows you to make settings for the

01V96i console from your computer. It also allows you

to back up the settings of the console, and to create set-

ups even when the physical console is not available.

01V96i Editor runs within the platform software “Stu-

dio Manager Version 2.”

■ Studio Manager Version 2

This is software that centrally manages multiple editors.

01V96i Editor also runs within this software. It allows

you to save or recall settings for multiple devices simul-

taneously.

These software can be downloaded from the Yamaha

Pro Audio website.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

For details on installation and setup, refer to the above

website and to the installation guide that was included

with the program you downloaded.

8 Welcome

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Firmware updates

This product is designed to allow the internal firmware

to be updated in order to improve performance, add

functionality, or fix problems. Firmware updates are

performed with the product connected to a computer,

so you must first install the “Yamaha Steinberg USB

Driver” in your computer.

Firmware updating is performed using update soft-

ware. You can download the update software from the

following website.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

For details on the update procedure and settings, refer

to the firmware update guide provided on the website.

About this Owner’s

Manual

■ Owner’s manual (this document)

The owner’s manual describes the names and functions

of items on the panels, and explains basic operation.

■ Reference manual (PDF format)

This explains details of the functionality, the effect

parameters, and MIDI-related functions.

The Reference Manual is available on the Yamaha Pro

Audio website.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

Conventions Used in this

Manual

The 01V96i features two types of buttons: physical but-

tons that you can press (e.g., ENTER and DISPLAY)

and buttons that appear on the display pages. Refer-

ences to physical buttons are enclosed in square brack-

ets, for example, “press the [ENTER] button.”

References to display page buttons are not emphasized,

for example, “move the cursor to the ON button.”

You can select display pages by using the [DISPLAY]

buttons or the Left Tab Scroll, Right Tab Scroll, and

F1–4 buttons below the display. In order to simplify

explanations, the procedures reference only the [DIS-

PLAY] button method.

See “Selecting Display Pages” on page 20 for details on

all the ways in which you can select pages.

Using the PDF manual

The reference manual is provided as a PDF-format

electronic file that you can view on your computer. By

using “Adobe

®Reader®” to view this file on your com-

puter, you’ll be able to rapidly search for terms, print

only the pages you require, or click a link to access a

relevant section. In particular, searching for terms

and clicking links are conveniences available only in

an electronic file, and we hope you take advantage of

these possibilities.

The latest version of Adobe Reader can be down-

loaded from the following website.

http://www.adobe.com/

Control Surface & Rear Panel 9

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface

& Rear Panel

Control Surface & Rear Panel

Control Surface

SOLO SOLO

ON ON

SOLO

ONON

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE

LAYER

SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SELSEL

ST IN

ENTER

STEREO

DEC INC

SOLO CLEAR

RECALL

STORE

SCENE MEMORY

PHONES

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

2TR IN

CH15

2TR IN

LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

20dB

-16

-60

GAIN

20dB

-16

-60

GAIN

20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

PA D

FADER MODE

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUX 1

AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 BUS 1 BUS 2 BUS 3 BUS 4 BUS 5 BUS 6 BUS 7 BUS 8

AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4

AUX 8AUX 7AUX 6AUX 5

HOME (METER)

DYNAMICS

EQ EFFECT VIEW

PATCH

UTILITYMIDISCENE

DIO/SETUP

/ INSERT/

DELAY

PAN/

ROUTING

PAIR/

GROUP

1513

121110987643215

INSERT I

O INSERT I

IN OUT

2TR

-10dBV (UNBAL)

PHANTOM +48V

CH9-12CH5-8CH1-4

INPUT

(BAL)

INSERT

OUT IN

(UNBAL)

ST IN 1 ST IN 2

USER DEFINED

KEYS

+10

1010

1515

2020

303030

4040

5050

6060

7070

+10

50505050

+10

303030

+10

123456

8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

32313029282726252423222120191817

STEREO

13 14 15 16

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-36

-48

HIGH

HIGH-MID

LOW-MID

LOW

FREQUENCY

GAIN

AD Input Section (p. 10)

SELECTED

CHANNEL

Section (p. 14)

Monitor Out

& Head-

phones Sec-

tion (p. 11)

SOLO Section

(p. 15)

Channel Strip Section (p. 11) STEREO Section (p. 11) USER DEFINED KEYS

Section (p. 14)

Data Entry

Section (p. 15)

LAYER Section

(p. 13)

SCENE MEMORY Section (p. 14)

Display Section

(p. 13)

DISPLAY ACCESS

Section (p. 12)

ST IN Section

(p. 12)

FADER MODE

Section (p. 12)

Note: Screw holes for attaching a cover are located at both sides of the AD input section of the 01V96i. (Size M3, horizontal

spacing 417 mm, vertical spacing 36 mm.) You may wish to fabricate your own cover and attach it to the front panel to prevent

the controls from being operated inadvertently. Yamaha does not sell such a cover. If you fabricate and attach your own cover,

make sure that the mounting screws do not extend more than 10 mm into the front panel. You will need to allow approximately

15–20 mm between the top panel and the cover in order to clear the control knobs and buttons.

10 Control Surface & Rear Panel

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

AD Input Section

1 INPUT connectors A/B

INPUT A connectors are balanced XLR-3-31-type

connectors that accept line-level and microphone

signals. Each of the phantom [+48V] switches on

the rear panel turns on or off the +48V phantom

power feed to the corresponding input. INPUT B

connectors are balanced TRS phone-type connec-

tors that accept line-level and microphone signals.

The nominal signal level of both types of connec-

tors ranges from –60 dB to +4 dB. Phantom power

is not supplied to these connectors.

If you connect cables to INPUT A and INPUT B

connectors of the same number, only the signal

from INPUT B is effective.

2 INPUT connectors 13–16

These balanced TRS phone-type connectors accept

line-level signals. The nominal signal level ranges

from –26 dB to +4 dB. INPUT 15 & 16 connectors

are available only when the AD 15/16 button is

turned off.

3 INSERT I/O connectors

These unbalanced TRS phone-type connectors are

used for channel insert ins and outs. Use a split

cable to insert an external effects processor to AD

input channels.

4 PAD switches

These switches turn on or off the 20 dB pad (atten-

uator) for each AD Input.

5 GAIN controls

These controls adjust input sensitivity for each AD

Input. Input sensitivity is –16 dB to –60 dB when

the Pad is off, and +4 dB to –40 dB when the Pad is

on.

6 PEAK indicators

These indicators light up when the input signal level

is 3 dB below clipping. Adjust the Pad switch and

GAIN control so that the indicator rarely lights up

at signal peak.

7 SIGNAL indicators

These indicators light up when the input signal level

exceeds –34 dB.

8 AD15/16 selector

This button selects AD Input Channel 15 and 16

signals. When the button is turned on (pushed in),

the 2TR IN signals (page 17) are selected. When the

button is turned off (raised), the INPUT 15 and 16

signals are selected.

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

CH15

2TR IN

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

20dB

-16 -60

GAIN

20dB

-16 -60

GAIN

20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB

-16 -60

GAIN

-16 -60

GAIN

-16 -60

GAIN

-16 -60

GAIN

-16 -60

GAIN

-16 -60

GAIN

-16 -60

PAD

1513

121110943215

INSERT I

O INSERT I

CH1-4

INPUT

(BAL)

INSERT

OUT IN

(UNBAL)

13 14 15 16

1/4" TRS phone plug

Ring (cold)

Sleeve (ground)

Tip (hot)

Male XLR plug

1 (ground)

2 (hot)

3 (cold)

1/4" phone

plug

1/4" phone plug

Sleeve (ground)

Tip (send)

Sleeve

(ground)

Connect to

INSERT jack

Tip (return)

1/4" phone plug

Tip (send)

Ring (return)

Sleeve (ground)

From processor’s output

To processor’s input

Control Surface 11

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface

& Rear Panel

Monitor Out & Headphones

Section

1 2TR IN/OUT connectors

These unbalanced RCA phono connectors input

and output line-level signals, and are typically used

to connect an external recorder.

When the AD15/16 selector in the AD Input sec-

tion (

8) is turned on (pushed in), the signals input

at the 2TR IN connectors are routed to AD Input

Channels 15 and 16. When the Monitor Source

selector (

2) is turned on (pushed in), you can

monitor the 2TR IN signals from the MONITOR

OUT connectors.

The 2TR OUT signals are always the same as the

STEREO OUT signals.

2 Monitor Source selector

This button selects the signals output from the

MONITOR OUT connectors on the rear panel.

When this button is turned on (pushed in), you can

monitor the signals input from the 2TR IN connec-

tors. When the button is turned off (raised), you can

monitor the Stereo Out signals or soloed channel

signals.

3 MONITOR LEVEL control

This control adjusts the monitoring level of the sig-

nals output from the MONITOR OUT connectors.

4 PHONES LEVEL control

This control sets the level of the PHONES.

5 PHONES jack

You can connect a set of stereo headphones to this

stereo phone jack. The signals output from the

MONITOR OUT connectors are also output from

this jack.

Channel Strip Section

1 [SEL] buttons

These buttons enable you to

select desired channels. The

[SEL] button indicator for the

currently-selected channel lights

up. The channel selected by each

[SEL] button depends on the

layer selected in the LAYER sec-

tion (see page 13).

These buttons also allow you to

create or cancel channel pairs,

and add channels to (or remove

them from) Fader, Mute, EQ, and

Compressor groups.

2 [SOLO] buttons

These buttons solo the selected

channels. The [SOLO] button

indicator of the currently-soloed

channel lights up.

3 [ON] buttons

These buttons turn the selected

channels on or off. The [ON]

button indicators for On chan-

nels light up.

4 Channel faders

Depending on the button selected in the FADER

MODE section (see page 12), these faders adjust the

selected channel input levels or the Bus Out or Aux

Out levels.

STEREO Section

1 [SEL] button

Selects the Stereo Out.

2 [ON] button

Turns the Stereo Out on or off.

3 [STEREO] fader

This 100mm motorized fader

adjusts the final output level of

the Stereo Out.

PHONES

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

2TR IN

LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

IN OUT

2TR

-10dBV

(UNBAL)

PHANTOM +48V

CH9-12CH5-8

SOLO

SEL

AUX 1

+10

SEL

STEREO

12 Control Surface & Rear Panel

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

ST IN Section

1 [ST IN] button

This button selects an ST IN channel pair (ST IN

Channels 1 & 2 or 3 & 4) which you can control

using the buttons and controls in the ST IN section.

The indicators to the right of the button indicate the

available ST IN channels.

2 [SEL] buttons

These buttons select the ST IN channel you want to

control.

3 [SOLO] buttons

These buttons solo the selected ST IN channels.

4 [ON] buttons

These buttons turn the ST IN channels on or off.

5 Level controls

These controls adjust the ST IN channel levels.

FADER MODE Section

1 [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons

These buttons enable you to select the Aux Send

you wish to control. Pressing one of these buttons

switches the Fader mode (see page 22), and displays

the corresponding Aux page. (The selected button’s

indicator lights up.)

You can now adjust the send level of signals routed

from Input Channels to the corresponding Aux

buses by using the faders.

2 [HOME] button

This button recalls Meter pages that display Input

Channel levels or Output Channel (Bus Out, Aux

Out, Stereo Out) levels (see page 23).

DISPLAY ACCESS Section

1 [SCENE] button

This button displays a Scene page, enabling you to

store and recall Scenes.

2 [DIO/SETUP] button

This button displays a DIO/Setup page, enabling

you to set up the 01V96i, including digital input and

output setup and remote control setup.

3 [MIDI] button

This button displays a MIDI page, enabling you to

make MIDI settings.

4 [UTILITY] button

This button displays a Utility page, enabling you to

use the internal oscillators and view information

about installed optional cards.

5 [ /INSERT/DELAY] button

This button displays a /INS/DLY page, enabling

you to switch the signal phase, set the signal to be

inserted, or set the delay parameters.

6 [PAN/ROUTING] button

This button displays a Pan/Route page, enabling

you to select a Bus to which the selected channel

signal is routed, adjust the selected channel pan set-

tings, adjust the level of signals routed from Buses

1–8 to the Stereo Bus, and adjust the stereo or sur-

round pan settings.

7 [PAIR/GROUP] button

This button displays a Pair/Group page, enabling

you to create or cancel channel pairs and group

multiple channel faders or [ON] buttons.

8 [PATCH] button

This button displays a Patch page, enabling you to

patch input signals and Bus Out signals to Input

channels, or patch signals to the desired output con-

nectors.

9 [DYNAMICS] button

This button displays a Dynamics page, enabling you

to control channel gates and compressors.

SOLO

SEL SEL

ST IN

ST IN 1 ST IN 2

FADER MODE

AUX

HOME (METER)

DISPLAY ACCESS

DYNAMICS

EQ EFFECT VIEW

PATCH

UTILITYMIDISCENE

DIO/SETUP

/ INSERT/

DELAY

PAN/

ROUTING

PAIR/

GROUP

1 2 3

0 A B

UTILITYMIDISCENE

DIO/SETUP

Control Surface 13

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface

& Rear Panel

0 [EQ] button

This button displays an EQ page, enabling you to set

the equalizer and attenuator of the selected channel.

A [EFFECT] button

This button displays an Effect page, enabling you to

edit the internal effects processors and use optional

plug-in cards.

B [VIEW] button

This button displays a View page, enabling you to

view and set mix parameters for a specific channel.

LAYER Section

1 [1–16]/[17–32] buttons

These buttons select an Input Channel layer as the

layer controlled in the Channel Strip section. When

the [1–16] button is turned on, you can control

Channels 1–16. When the [17–32] button is turned

on, you can control Channels 17–32. (See page 21

for more information on the Input Channel layers.)

2 [MASTER] button

This button selects the Master Layer as the layer

controlled in the Channel Strip section. You can use

this layer to control Bus Outs and AUX Sends. (See

page 21 for more information on the Master layer.)

3 [REMOTE] button

This button selects the Remote Layer as the layer

controlled in the Channel Strip section. You can use

this layer to control external MIDI devices or com-

puter-based DAWs.

Display Section

1 Display

This is a 320 x 240 dot LCD display with a backlight.

2 Stereo meters

These 12-segment level meters display the final out-

put level of the Stereo Bus.

3 Contrast control

This control adjusts the display contrast.

4 [F1]–[F4] buttons

These buttons select a page from a multi-page

screen. Selecting a tab at the bottom of the screen

using one of these buttons displays the correspond-

ing page. (See page 20 for more information on dis-

playing a page.)

5 Left Tab Scroll [ ] button

6 Right Tab Scroll [ ] button

If there are more pages available than the four

whose tabs are currently displayed, use these but-

tons to display the additional tabs. These buttons

are available only when the left or right Tab Scroll

arrow appears.

Tip: The ST IN section is not affected by the layer settings.

1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE

LAYER

1 2 3

STEREO

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-36

-48

Tab Scroll arrow

14 Control Surface & Rear Panel

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

SELECTED CHANNEL Section

1 [PAN] control

This control adjusts the pan of the channel selected

by the [SEL] button.

2 [HIGH] button

3 [HIGH-MID] button

4 [LOW-MID] button

5 [LOW] button

These buttons select the EQ band (HIGH,

HIGH-MID, LOW-MID, LOW) of the channel

selected by the [SEL] button. The corresponding

button indicator of the currently-selected band

lights up.

6 [Q] control

This control adjusts the currently-selected band Q.

7 [FREQUENCY] control

This control adjusts the currently-selected band fre-

quency.

8 [GAIN] control

This control adjusts the currently-selected band

gain.

SCENE MEMORY Section

1 [STORE] button

This button enables you to store the current mix

settings. (See page 42 for more information on

Scene Memories.)

2 Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons

These buttons select a Scene to store or recall. Press-

ing the Scene Up [ ] button increments the selec-

tion; pressing the Scene Down [ ] button

decrements the selection. Holding down either key

increments or decrements the selection continu-

ously.

3 [RECALL] button

This button recalls the Scene memory selected by

the Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons.

USER DEFINED KEYS Section

1 [1]–[8] buttons

You can assign any of the 167 functions to these

User Defined buttons.

HIGH

HIGH-MID

LOW-MID

LOW

FREQUENCY

GAIN

RECALL

STORE

SCENE MEMORY

USER DEFINED

KEYS

Control Surface 15

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface

& Rear Panel

Data Entry Section

1 Parameter wheel

This control adjusts the parameter values shown on

the display. Turning it clockwise increases the value;

turning it counterclockwise decreases the value.

This wheel also enables you to scroll a displayed list

and select a character for entry (see page 21).

2 [ENTER] button

This button activates a selected (highlighted) but-

ton on the display, and confirms the edited param-

eter values.

3 [DEC]/[INC] buttons

These buttons increment or decrement a parameter

value by one. Pressing the [INC] button increments

the value; pressing the [DEC] button decrements

the value. Holding down either key increments or

decrements the value continuously.

4 Left, Right, Up, Down ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ])

cursor buttons

These buttons move the cursor around the display

pages, or select parameters and options. Holding

down a cursor button moves the cursor continu-

ously in the corresponding direction.

SOLO Section

1 [SOLO] indicator

This indicator flashes when single

or multiple channels are soloed.

2 [CLEAR] button

This button “unsolos” all soloed

Channels.

ENTER

DEC INC

SOLO CLEAR

1 2

16 Control Surface & Rear Panel

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Rear Panel

PHANTOM +48V

1 CH1–4 ON/OFF switch

2 CH5–8 ON/OFF switch

3 CH9–12 ON/OFF switch

Each of these switches turns on or off the +48V

phantom power feed to four corresponding inputs.

When the switches are on, +48V phantom power is

supplied to the INPUT A connectors.

AD Output Section

1 MONITOR OUT connectors L/R

These balanced TRS phone-type connectors output

monitoring signals or 2TR IN signals. The nominal

signal level is +4 dB.

You can select signals using the Monitor Source

selector.

2 OMNI OUT connectors 1–4

These balanced TRS phone-type connectors output

any Bus signals or channel Direct Out signals. The

nominal signal level is +4 dB.

PHANTOM +48V (p. 16)

Power Section (p. 18)

AD Output Section

(p. 16)

SLOT Section (p. 18)

MIDI/USB Section

(p. 17)

Digital I/O Section

(p. 17)

Note:

• Make sure that this switch is turned off if phan-

tom power is not required.

• Before you turn on phantom power, make sure

that only devices requiring phantom power (such

as condenser mics) are connected. Supplying

phantom power to a device that does not require

it will cause malfunctions.

• Do not connect or disconnect a device while

phantom power is on. Doing so will damage the

device or the console.

• To protect your speakers, make sure that the

power amps (powered speakers) are off before

you turn phantom power on or off. We also rec-

ommend that all output level faders be mini-

mized. If you fail to observe these precautions,

high volume output may occur, possibly damag-

ing your hearing or your equipment.

321

1/4" TRS phone plug

Ring

(cold)

Sleeve (ground)

Tip (hot)

1/4" TRS phone plug

Ring

(cold)

Sleeve (ground)

Tip (hot)

Rear Panel 17

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface

& Rear Panel

3 STEREO OUT connectors L/R

These balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors output

the Stereo Out signals. The nominal signal level is

+4 dB.

Digital I/O Section

1 WORD CLOCK OUT connector

This BNC connector outputs a wordclock signal

from the 01V96i to a connected external device.

2 WORD CLOCK IN connector

This BNC connector inputs a wordclock signal

from a connected external device to the 01V96i.

3 ADAT IN/OUT connectors

These optical connectors input and output ADAT

digital audio signals.

4 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL

This RCA phono connector outputs consumer for-

mat (IEC 60958) digital audio. The connector is

typically used to connect the digital stereo input

(consumer format) of a DAT recorder, MD

recorder, or CD recorder.

5 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL

This RCA phono connector accepts consumer for-

mat (IEC 60958) digital audio. The connector is

typically used to connect the digital stereo output

(consumer format) of a DAT recorder, MD

recorder, or CD recorder.

MIDI/USB Section

1 MIDI IN/THRU/OUT ports

These standard MIDI IN, OUT and THRU ports

enable you to connect the 01V96i to other MIDI

equipment.

2 TO HOST USB port

This USB port enables you to connect a computer

equipped with a USB 2.0 port.

Female XLR plug

1 (ground)

2 (hot)

3 (cold)

42153

Note when using the TO HOST USB port

When connecting the 01V96i to a computer via the

TO HOST USB port, please take the following mea-

sures.

If you fail to take these measures, your computer or

the 01V96i may stop operating (hang up), or data

may be lost or damaged. If the computer or console

stops operating, turn the power off and on again, and

reboot the computer.

• Before connecting the TO HOST USB port to

your computer, disable the power conservation

(suspend/sleep/standby/hibernate) settings of

your computer.

• Connect the TO HOST USB port to the computer

before you power-on the console.

• Before powering the console on/off or connect-

ing/disconnecting the USB cable, you must do the

following.

- Close all applications.

- Make sure that the console is not transmitting

data. (The console also transmits data when

you operate its buttons or move its faders.)

• Leave an interval of at least six seconds between

powering the console off and on, or between dis-

connecting and reconnecting the USB cable.

18 Control Surface & Rear Panel

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

SLOT Section

1 SLOT

Optional mini-YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital

Audio Interface) I/O cards can be installed in this

slot. You can install AD/DA cards or digital I/O

cards supporting a variety of digital formats includ-

ing AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam.

Input signals from an I/O card can be patched to

any desired input channel or insert-in (see page 29).

The output signal of any desired bus or the direct

signal of an input channel can be patched to an out-

put of an I/O card (see page 30).

Power Section

1 POWER ON/OFF

switch

This switch turns the

power to the 01V96i on

or off.

2 AC IN connector

This connector enables you to connect the 01V96i

to an AC outlet via the supplied power cord. Be sure

to plug the AC power cord into this connector

before plugging the power cord into an AC outlet.

Caution

Even when the POWER ON/OFF switch is in the

off position, a small amount of electricity is still

flowing to the unit. When you are not using the

01V96i for a long time, make sure to unplug the

AC power cord from the AC outlet.

Installing an Optional Card

Visit the following Yamaha Pro Audio web site to

ensure that the card you are installing is supported by

the 01V96i.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

Follow the steps below to install an optional

mini-YGDAI card.

1. Make sure that the power to the 01V96i

is turned off.

2. Undo the two fixing screws and remove

the slot cover, as shown below.

Keep the cover and fixing screws in a safe place for

future use.

3. Insert the card between the guide rails

and slide it all the way into the slot, as

shown below.

You may have to push firmly to fully insert the card

into the internal connector.

Caution

When inserting the card, align both sides of the

card with the guide rails in the slot of the host

device.

4. Secure the card using the attached

thumbscrews.

Tighten the screws firmly to secure the card. Other-

wise, the card may not be grounded correctly.

Note: To prevent loud clicks and thumps in your speak-

ers, turn on your audio equipment in the following

order (reverse this order when turning the equipment

off)—sound sources, multitrack and master recorders,

01V96i, monitoring power amplifiers.

Operating Basics 19

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Operating Basics

This chapter describes basic operations on the 01V96i,

including how to use the display and operate the con-

trols on the top panel.

About the Display

The top panel display indicates various parameters that

you must set before you can operate the 01V96i. The

display indicates the following items:

1 Selected DISPLAY

This section indicates the currently-selected display

page group.

2 Selected channel

This section indicates the Input or Output Channel

currently selected by its corresponding [SEL] but-

ton. The first four characters are the Channel ID

(e.g., CH1–CH32, BUS1–BUS8, AUX1–AUX8,

ST-L, ST-R). The second four characters are the

channel’s Short name. You can edit the short name

if you desire (see page 43).

3 Current Scene

This section indicates the number and title of the

currently-selected Scene memory. If the selected

Scene is write-protected, a padlock icon ( )

appears.

4 EDIT indicator

This indicator appears when the current mix set-

tings no longer match those of the Scene that was

most-currently recalled.

5 MIDI indicator

This indicator appears when the 01V96i is receiving

MIDI data via the MIDI IN port, USB port, or an

installed card.

6 Surround mode indicator

This indicator identifies the currently-selected Sur-

round mode (ST=stereo, 3-1, 5.1, or 6.1).

7 Sampling rate indicator

This indicator identifies the 01V96i’s current sam-

pling rate: 44.1 kHz (44k), 48 kHz (48k), 88.2 kHz

(88k), or 96 kHz (96k).

8 ST IN channel levels

These level controls indicate the level of ST IN

channels 1–4.

9 Page title

This section indicates the title of the current page.

0 Channel name

On certain pages, this area displays the Long name

of the channel currently selected by the [SEL] key or

the channel selected by the cursor keys.

A Page area

This page area displays various page contents.

B Page tabs

These tabs enable you to select a display page.

C Tab Scroll arrows

These arrows indicate that more pages are available.

843 5 672

CBA

20 Operating Basics

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Selecting Display Pages

To select a display page:

1. Press the corresponding button on the

top panel to select the desired page

group.

Display pages are grouped by function. To select a

page group, press the desired button in the DIS-

PLAY ACCESS section.

2. You can select pages that have cur-

rently-displayed tabs by pressing the

[F1]–[F4] buttons.

If the selected display page group contains multiple

pages, press the [F1]–[F4] buttons below the corre-

sponding tab to select a specific page.

3. To select a page for which a tab is not cur-

rently displayed, press either the Left or

Right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll button

(depending on where the page is

located) to display the page tab, then

press the corresponding [F1]–[F4] but-

ton.

If display page groups contain more than four

pages, either the left or right arrow appears. To dis-

play the currently-hidden tabs, press the Right or

Left [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll button.

You can also select a page from a page group as fol-

lows:

• Selecting the next page in a page group:

Press the button you selected in Step 1 repeatedly.

This enables you to select a page that has a hidden

tab.

• To select the previous page in a page group:

Press and hold down the button you selected in Step

1. The screen steps back through the pages one by

one. Release the button when the desired page is

displayed. This enables you to select a page that has

a hidden tab.

• To select the first page in the group:

Double-click the button you selected in Step 1.

4. Press the cursor buttons to move the cur-

sor (a bold frame) to a button, parameter

box, rotary control, or fader so that you

can change the value.

Display Interface

This section describes how to use the display interface.

Rotary Controls & Faders

The rotary controls and fad-

ers enable you to adjust the

continuously variable param-

eter values, including Input

Channel levels and effects

parameters. Press the cursor

buttons to move the cursor to

a rotary control or fader you

want to adjust, then rotate the

Parameter wheel or press the

[INC]/[DEC] buttons to

modify the value.

Buttons

The buttons enable you to turn

certain functions on (enabled) or

off (disabled). Move the cursor to

the appropriate button, then press

the [ENTER] button to turn the function on (high-

lighted) or off. The buttons also enable you to select one

of two options or to execute certain functions.

Parameter Boxes

The parameter boxes enable

you to select one of multiple

options. Press the cursor but-

tons to move the cursor to a

parameter box, then rotate

the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons

to select the setting.

You may need to press the [ENTER] button to confirm

a change in certain parameter boxes. If you edit a value

in this type of parameter box, the value flashes. Press the

[ENTER] button to confirm the change, and the flash-

ing stops. If you move the cursor to other parameters

while the edited value is flashing, the edit is cancelled.

Tip: The 01V96i remembers the current page and

parameter when you select a new page group. If you

return to the previous page group, the 01V96i displays

the correct page, with the same parameter selected.

Selecting Layers 21

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Operating Basics

Confirmation Messages

For certain functions, the 01V96i prompts you for con-

firmation before executing the functions, as shown here.

Move the cursor to YES and press [ENTER] to execute

the function, or move the cursor to NO and press

[ENTER] to cancel.

If you take no action for awhile, the confirmation win-

dow closes automatically and the function is not exe-

cuted.

Title Edit Window

The Title Edit window enables you to enter titles for

Scene and library memories. You can enter 4, 12, or 16

characters, depending on the item.

The figure on the left shows uppercase characters and

various punctuation marks. The figure on the right

shows lowercase characters and numbers.

Use the cursor buttons to select characters, and press

the [ENTER] button to enter them into the title. The

cursor moves to the right automatically as each charac-

ter is entered. Use the Parameter wheel to move the cur-

sor within the title.

Use the SHIFT LOCK button to select uppercase or

lowercase characters, and use the SPC button to enter a

space.

To insert a space at the cursor position and move sub-

sequent characters to the right, move the cursor to the

INS button and press [ENTER].

To delete the character at the cursor position and move

subsequent characters to the left, move the cursor to the

DEL button and press [ENTER].

When you have finished, move the cursor to the OK

button, then press [ENTER] to confirm the title. To

cancel the title entry, move the cursor to the CANCEL

button, then press [ENTER].

Selecting Layers

Input Channels and Output Channels (Bus Outs & Aux

Outs) are arranged into layers, as illustrated below.

There are four layers altogether.

The currently-selected

layer determines the

function of the channel

strip, [SEL] buttons,

[SOLO] buttons, [ON]

buttons, and faders. Use the LAYER buttons to select a

layer you wish to edit using the channel strip controls.

The following table shows the layers that you can access

using the LAYER buttons, and the parameters you can

control using the channel strips on each layer.

LAYER

buttons

Layers

Channel Strips

1–8 9–16

[1–16]

button

Input Channel

Layer 1–16

Input Channels 1–16

[17–32]

button

Input Channel

Layer 17–32

Input Channels 17–32

[REMOTE]

button

Remote Layer

Operation depends on the

selected target.

[MASTER]

button

Master Layer

Aux Send

masters 1–8

Bus Out mas-

ters 1–8

Tip:

• The function of each channel strip fader depends on the

currently-selected Fader mode (see page 22).

• The STEREO [SEL] button, [ON] button, and [STE-

REO] fader always control the Stereo Out signal, regard-

less of the Layer settings.

• The ST IN [SEL] buttons, [SOLO] buttons, [ON] but-

tons, and level control knobs always adjust the ST IN

channels selected via the [ST IN] button regardless of the

Layer settings.

Input Channel Layer 17–32

Input Channel Layer 1–16

Remote Layer

Master Layer

1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE

LAYER

22 Operating Basics

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Selecting Channels

To select a channel on the 01V96i,

press the corresponding [SEL]

button. To adjust the Pan and EQ

settings, use the rotary controls in

the SELECTED CHANNEL sec-

tion. To select a channel on pages

that cover multiple channels, press

the corresponding [SEL] button.

1. Press the corresponding

LAYER button to select a

layer that includes the

desired channel (see

page 21).

To select ST IN channels, press

the [ST IN] button.

2. Use the corresponding [SEL] button to

select the desired channel.

The channel is selected and the [SEL] button indi-

cator lights up.

The Channel’s ID and short name appear in the

upper-left corner of the display. If the currently-dis-

played page contains a relevant channel parameter,

the cursor moves to that parameter automatically. If

the currently-displayed page contains no such

parameter, a page that does contain such a parame-

ter is selected automatically.

3. To select the Stereo Out, press the STE-

REO [SEL] button.

Repeatedly pressing the STEREO [SEL] button tog-

gles between the Stereo Out left and Stereo Out

right channels.

If the currently-displayed page contains a relevant

Stereo Out parameter, the cursor moves to that

parameter automatically. If the currently-displayed

page contains no such parameter, a page that does

contain such a parameter is selected automatically.

Selecting Fader Modes

The function of channel faders (1–16) depends on the

selected Layer and Fader mode.

1. Select a layer that includes the desired

channel (see page 21).

2. Press the FADER MODE buttons to select

a Fader mode.

The button indicators identify the following Fader

modes:

• When the [HOME] button indicator lights up:

You can use channel faders to control Input Chan-

nels and ST IN Channel levels or Output Channels

(Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8) master levels.

• When one of the [AUX1]–[AUX8] button indica-

tors light up:

You can use channel faders to control the corre-

sponding Aux Send level.

The following table shows the channel fader functions

for each Layer and Fader mode.

Tip: For paired Input or Output Channels, the channel

for which you pressed the [SEL] button is selected, and

its indicator lights up. The [SEL] button indicator of

the paired partner flashes.

HIGH

HIGH-MID

LOW-MID

LOW

FREQUENCY

GAIN

LAYER

buttons

Fader Mode

Channel Strip Fader

1–8 9–16

[1–16]

button

[HOME] button Input Channel 1–16 level

[AUX1]–[AUX8]

buttons

Input Channel 1–16 Aux

Send level

[17–32]

button

[HOME] button Input Channel 17–32 level

[AUX1]–[AUX8]

buttons

Input Channel 17–32 Aux

Send level

[REMOTE]

button

[HOME] button

Operation depends on the

selected target.

[AUX1]–[AUX8]

buttons

[MASTER]

button

[HOME] button

Aux Send

master 1–8

output level

Bus Out

master1–8

output level

[AUX1]–[AUX8]

buttons

No operation

Note: You cannot select the [AUX1]–[AUX8] buttons

while the Master layer is selected. If you switch to the Mas-

ter layer while one of the [AUX1]–[AUX8] button indica-

tors is lit, the indicator automatically turns off and the

[HOME] button indicator lights up.

FADER MODE

AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4

AUX 8AUX 7AUX 6AUX 5

HOME (METER)

Metering 23

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Operating Basics

Metering

This section describes how to check Input and Output

Channel levels using the Meter pages.

1. Press the FADER MODE [HOME] button

repeatedly until the Meter | Position

page appears.

This page enables you to set the metering position

for Input and Output Channels.

1 INPUT section

This section enables you to select the metering

position for Input Channel and ST IN Channel sig-

nals.

2 OUTPUT section

This section enables you to select the metering

position for Output Channel (Aux Out 1–8, Bus

Out 1–8, Stereo Out) signals.

2. Move the cursor to the desired parame-

ter button in the INPUT or OUTPUT sec-

tion, then press [ENTER].

You can select one of the following three positions

in each section.

• PRE EQ ................Immediately before EQ.

• PRE FADER........Immediately before the fader.

• POST FADER.....Immediately after the fader.

3. Press the FADER MODE [HOME] button

repeatedly until the page listed below

that contains the desired channels

appears.

•CH1-32 page

This page displays the Input Channel 1–32 levels

respectively.

•ST IN page

This page displays the left and right ST IN Channel

1–4 levels separately.

•Master page

This section displays the Output Channel (Aux Out

1–8, Bus Out 1–8, Stereo Out) levels altogether.

24 Operating Basics

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

•Effect page

This page displays the internal effects processor 1–4

input and output levels altogether.

•Stereo page

This page displays the Stereo Out output level.

If you selected the CH1-32 page or the Master page,

use the MASTER MODE parameter to select one of

the following three metering signal types:

• GATE GR.............The amount of gain reduction

for the gate (only for CH1-32)

• COMP GR ...........The amount of gain reduction

for the compressor

• LEVEL ..................Input Channel input level, or

Output Channel output level

4. To activate the Peak Hold function, move

the cursor to the PEAK HOLD button,

then press [ENTER].

The PEAK HOLD button turns on, and the peak

level is held on the meters on the page. To cancel the

Peak Hold function, turn the PEAK HOLD button

off.

Tip: These pages also allow you to change the metering

position using the POSITION parameter. This param-

eter setting operates in unison with the Meter | Position

page setting.

Connections and Setup 25

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Connections

and Setup

Connections and Setup

This chapter explains how to connect and set up your 01V96i.

Connections

The following section explains two typical ways to connect the 01V96i to external equipment, although there are

numerous others.

■ Configuring an analog 16–24-channel mixing system

This illustration shows a simple system with 16 analog channels using the 01V96i’s INPUT connectors 1–16.

If an optional AD card (such as the MY8-AD or MY8-AD96) is installed in the slot, up to 24 analog channels can be

mixed.

Tip: You can adjust the gain of the AD card channels by setting the DIP switches on the card. For more information, see your

AD card documentation.

REC

SONG SCENE

MUSIC

PRODUCTION

SYNTHESIZER

Integrated

Sampling

Sequencer

Real-timeExternalControl

Surface

Modular

SynthesisPlug-in

System

REC

SONG SCENE

MUSIC

PRODUCTION

SYNTHESIZER

Integrated

Sampling

Sequencer

Real-timeExternalControl

Surface

Modular

SynthesisPlug-in

System

VOL VOL

SOLO SOLO

ON ON

SOLO

ONON

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE

LAYER

SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SELSEL

ST IN

ENTER

STEREO

DEC INC

SOLO CLEAR

RECALL

STORE

SCENE MEMORY

PHONES

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

2TR IN

CH15

2TR IN

LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

20dB

-16

-60

GAIN

20dB

-16

-60

GAIN

20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

PAD

FADER MODE

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUX 1

AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AU X 8 BUS 1 BUS 2 BUS 3 BUS 4 BUS 5 BUS 6 BUS 7 BUS 8

AUX 2 AU X 3 AU X 4

AUX 8AUX 7AUX 6AUX 5

HOME (METER)

DYNAMICS

EQ EFFECT VIEW

PATCH

UTILITYMIDISCENE

DIO/SETUP

/ INSERT/

DELAY

PAN/

ROUTING

PAIR /

GROUP

1513

121110987643215

INSERT I

O INSERT I

IN OUT

2TR

-10dBV (UNBAL)

PHANTOM +48V

CH9-12CH5-8CH1-4

INPUT

(BAL)

INSERT

OUTIN

(UNBAL)

ST IN 1 ST IN 2

USER DEFINED

KEYS

+10

1010

1515

2020

303030

4040

5050

6060

7070

+10

50505050

+10

303030

+10

123456

8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

32313029282726252423222120191817

STEREO

13 14 15 16

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-36

-48

HIGH

HIGH-MID

LOW-MID

LOW

FREQUENCY

GAIN

Synthesizer Synthesizer

Effects processor

External recorder

Monitoring system

Guitar

SLOT

INPUT connector

OMNI OUT connector

2TR IN connector

2TR OUT connector

MONITOR OUT

connectors

PHONES jack

INPUT connector

Optional AD

card (adds 8

input channels)

26 Connections and Setup

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

■ Configuring a recording system that uses a DAW (Digital Audio Workstation)

In this system, the 01V96i is connected to a computer-based DAW (Digital Audio Workstation). This allows the

01V96i to be used as an audio interface with 16-channel input and output. The 01V96i’s remote functionality can also

be used to perform locate and transport operations on the DAW, and to edit its parameters.

REC

SONG SCENE

MUSIC

PRODUCTION

SYNTHESIZER

Integrated

Sampling

Sequencer

Real-timeExternalControl

Surface

Modular

SynthesisPlug-in

System

VOL VOL

SOLO SOLO

ON ON

SOLO

ONON

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE

LAYER

SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SELSEL

ST IN

ENTER

STEREO

DEC INC

SOLO CLEAR

RECALL

STORE

SCENE MEMORY

PHONES

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

2TR IN

CH15

2TR IN

LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

20dB

-16

-60

GAIN

20dB

-16

-60

GAIN

20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

PAD

FADER MODE

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUX 1

AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AU X 8 BUS 1 BUS 2 BUS 3 BUS 4 BUS 5 BUS 6 BUS 7 BUS 8

AUX 2 AU X 3 AU X 4

AUX 8AUX 7AUX 6AUX 5

HOME (METER)

DYNAMICS

EQ EFFECT VIEW

PATCH

UTILITYMIDISCENE

DIO/SETUP

/ INSERT/

DELAY

PAN/

ROUTING

PAIR /

GROUP

1513

121110987643215

INSERT I

O INSERT I

OINSERT I

O INSERT I

IN OUT

2TR

-10dBV (UNBAL)

PHANTOM +48V

CH9-12CH5-8CH1-4

INPUT

(BAL)

INSERT

OUTIN

(UNBAL)

ST IN 1 ST IN 2

USER DEFINED

KEYS

+10

1010

1515

2020

303030

4040

5050

6060

7070

+10

50505050

+10

303030

+10

123456

8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

32313029282726252423222120191817

STEREO

13 14 15 16

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-36

-48

HIGH

HIGH-MID

LOW-MID

LOW

FREQUENCY

GAIN

Synthesizer

Computer

Effects processor

Monitoring system

INPUT connector

OMNI OUT connector

MONITOR OUT

connectors

PHONES jack

INPUT connector

TO HOST USB port

Wordclock Connections and Settings 27

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Connections

and Setup

Wordclock Connections

and Settings

About Wordclock

Digital audio equipment must be synchronized when

digital audio signals are transferred from one device to

another. Even if both devices use identical sampling

rates, digital signals may not transfer correctly, or audi-

ble noise or unwanted clicks may occur if the digital

audio processing circuits inside each digital audio

device are not synchronized with each other.

Wordclocks are signals that enable digital audio pro-

cessing circuits to synchronize with each other. In a

typical digital audio system, one device operates as the

wordclock master, transmitting wordclock signals, and

the other devices operate as wordclock slaves, synchro-

nizing to the wordclock master.

If you are digitally connecting the 01V96i to other

equipment, you must decide which device to use as the

wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves,

then set up all the devices accordingly. The 01V96i can

be used as the wordclock master running at either

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz, or slaved to an

external wordclock source.

Wordclock Connections

To establish wordclock synchronization between the

01V96i and external devices, you can distribute word-

clock signals independently via dedicated cables, or you

can use clock information derived from digital audio

connections.

The WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors transmit

and receive wordclock signals independently on the

01V96i. The following examples show two ways in

which wordclock signals can be distributed and received

via the WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors.

• Daisy Chain Distribution

In this example, the wordclock signal is distributed

in a “daisy-chain” fashion, with each device feeding

the wordclock signal from the wordclock out con-

nector on to the wordclock in connector of the next

device. This method of distribution is not recom-

mended for larger systems.

• Star Distribution

In this example, a dedicated wordclock distribution

box is used to supply wordclock signals from the

wordclock master to each wordclock slave individ-

ually.

If the external devices do not have wordclock in and

out connectors, you can use the clock information

included in the digital audio signals. In this case,

digital audio signals and wordclock signals are

transferred via the 2TR OUT DIGITAL and 2TR IN

DIGITAL jacks or via the digital I/O card installed

in the rear panel slot.

WC IN

(BNC)

WC OUT

(BNC)

WC OUT (BNC)

WC IN

(BNC)

WC IN

(BNC)

WC OUT

(BNC)

Wordclock

master

Device A

Wordclock

slave

Device B

Wordclock

slave

Device C

Wordclock

slave

WC OUT

(BNC)

WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC)

Wordclock

master

Device A

Wordclock

slave

Device B

Wordclock

slave

Device D

Wordclock

slave

Device C

Wordclock

slave

Wordclock

distribution box

SOLO SOLO

ON ON

SOLO

ONON

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

PEAK

SIGNAL

1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE

LAYER

SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SELSEL

ST IN

ENTER

STEREO

DEC INC

SOLO CLEAR

RECALL

STORE

SCENE MEMORY

PHONES

MONITOR

OUT

MONITOR

2TR IN

CH15

2TR IN

LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

-26

GAIN

20dB

-16

-60

GAIN

20dB

-16

-60

GAIN

20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB20dB

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

GAIN

-16

-60

PAD

FADER MODE

DISPLAY ACCESS

AUX

BUS

AUX

HOME (METER)

DYNAM ICS

EQ EFFECT VIEW

PATCH

UTILITYMIDISCENE

DIO/SETUP

/ INSERT/

DELAY

PAN/

ROUTING

PAIR /

GROUP

1513

121110987643215

INSERT I

O INSERT I

OINSERT I

O INSERT I

OINSERT I

O INSERT I

IN OUT

2TR

-10dBV (UNBAL)

PHANTOM +48V

CH9-12CH5-8CH1-4

INPUT

(BAL)

INSERT

OUTIN

(UNBAL)

ST IN 1 ST IN 2

USER DEFINED

KEYS

+10

1010

1515

2020

303030

4040

5050

6060

7070

+10

50505050

+10

303030

+10

123456

8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15 16

32313029282726252423222120191817

STEREO

13 14 15 16

OVER

-3

-6

-9

-12

-15

-18

-24

-30

-36

-48

HIGH

HIGH-MID

LOW-MID

LOW

FREQUENCY

GAIN

Digital I/O

card

External device

Digital audio signal

Wordclock signal

28 Connections and Setup

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Specifying the Wordclock

Source

To digitally connect the 01V96i to external devices, you

must specify the wordclock source for the system. Fol-

low the steps below.

1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP]

button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup |

Word Clock page appears.

On this page, you can view the current synchroni-

zation status of input signals at each slot and con-

nector.

The source select button indicators are explained

below:

A usable wordclock signal is present at this

input, and it is in sync with the current 01V96i

internal clock.

No wordclock signal is present at this input.

A usable wordclock signal is present at this

input, but it is out of sync with the current

01V96i internal clock.

This input is the currently-selected wordclock

source.

This input was selected as the wordclock

source, but no usable signal was received.

Either this input is not receiving wordclock, or

else it cannot be used with the cur-

rently-installed I/O card.

2. Use the cursor buttons to move the cur-

sor to a source, then press [ENTER].

The following are possible wordclock sources.

However, USB only displays the synchronization

status, and cannot be selected as the wordclock

master.

•SLOT

These buttons select the inputs from the digital I/O

card installed in the slot as the wordclock source.

Inputs are selected in pairs (odd and even numbers

in this order). The SLOT TYPE column displays the

names of any installed I/O card. The number of

pairs depends on the type of I/O card installed.

•adat

These buttons select the inputs from the ADAT IN

connector on the rear panel. Inputs are selected in

pairs (odd and even numbers in this order).

•WC IN

This button selects the wordclock signal input at the

WORD CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel.

•2TRD

This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL input as

the wordclock source.

• INT 44.1k, INT 48k, INT 88.2k, INT 96k

These buttons select the internal clock generator as

the wordclock source. The 01V96i will function as

the wordclock master.

•USB (display only)

This indicates the synchronization status of the sig-

nal being input from the TO HOST USB port. It

cannot be selected as the wordclock master.

Note: When you change the wordclock settings on any

device in your digital audio system, some devices may out-

put noise due to being out of synchronization. Be sure to

turn down your monitoring device before changing word-

clock settings.

Tip:

• The FS box displays the sampling frequency at which the

01V96i is currently operating.

• The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any

installed I/O card.

• The IN and OUT columns indicate the number of input

and output channels available for each installed I/O

card.

Note: To transfer data at higher sampling frequencies

(88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) between the 01V96i and connected

external devices, you need to set the data transfer format.

Tip: If wordclock transfer is interrupted while the 01V96i

(being used as a slave unit) is receiving the clock signal, the

unit will automatically switch to an internal clock (INT

44.1k/ INT 48k/INT 88.2k/INT 96k) that is closest to the

interrupted clock.

Input and Output Patching 29

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Connections

and Setup

Input and Output

Patching

The 01V96i is designed to enable you to patch (assign)

signals to Inputs and Outputs. This section explains

how to view the signals patched to Inputs and Outputs

and change the assignment.

Patching Input Channels

By default, the Input Channels are patched as follows:

• INPUT connectors 1–16....Input Channels 1–16

• ADAT IN channels 1–8......Input Channels 17–24

• Slot channels 1–8.................Input Channels 25–32

• Outputs 1–2 of Internal

Effects Processor 1–4 .........ST IN Channels 1–4

Follow the steps below to view or change the patching.

1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] but-

ton repeatedly until the following page

appears.

Inputs and Slot channels that are currently assigned

to Input Channels are shown in the parameter

boxes (

1) beneath the channel numbers. The

parameter indicators are explained below:

• – ...................................No assignment

• AD1–AD16 ............... INPUT connectors 1–16

• USB 1–USB 16.......... TO HOST USB port chan-

nels 1–16

• ADAT1–ADAT8 ...... ADAT IN channels 1–8

• SL-01–SL-16.............. Slot channels 1–16

• FX1-1–FX1-2............Outputs 1–2 of Internal

Effects Processor 1

• FX2-1–FX2-2............Outputs 1–2 of Internal

Effects Processor 2

• FX3-1–FX3-2 ............Outputs 1–2 of Internal

Effects Processor 3

• FX4-1–FX4-2 ............Outputs 1–2 of Internal

Effects Processor 4

• 2TD-L/R.....................2TR IN DIGITAL L/R con-

nectors

Follow the steps below to view or change the patching.

2. Use the cursor buttons to move the cur-

sor to a patch parameter (

1) for which

you want to change the assignment, and

rotate the Parameter wheel or press the

[INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the

patching.

3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.

Patching Omni Outs

By default, the output connectors are patched as follows:

• OMNI OUT connectors 1–4.... Aux Out 1–4

• ADAT OUT channels 1–8......... Bus Out 1–8

• Slot channels 1–8 ........................ Bus Out 1–8

• Slot channels 9–16...................... Bus Out 1–8

• 2TR DIGITAL connectors........ Stereo Out L & R

Follow the steps below to view or change the patching.

1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] but-

ton repeatedly until the following page

appears.

Tip: If the data from a connected instrument fails to be

input, or if you are unable to monitor the signal at the

desired output, check the I/O patching, as explained below:

Tip: To restore the default patching, recall Input Patch

memory #00.

Tip:

• The STEREO OUT connectors always output the Stereo

Bus signals.

• The MONITOR OUT connectors output monitor sig-

nals or the 2TR IN signals, depending on the Monitor

Source selector setting.

30 Connections and Setup

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Signals that are currently assigned to the output

connectors are shown in the parameter boxes (

underneath the connector numbers. The parameter

indicators are explained below:

• – ..........................................No assignment

• BUS1–BUS8 .....................Bus Out 1–8 signals

• AUX1–AUX8 ...................Aux Out 1–8 Signals

• ST L/R................................Stereo Out signals

• INS CH1–INS CH32......Input Channels 1–32

Insert Outs

• INS BUS1–INS BUS8 ....Bus Out 1–8 Insert Outs

• INS AUX1–INS AUX8 ..Aux Out 1–8 Insert Outs

• INS ST-L/ST-R ................Stereo Out Insert Outs

• CAS BUS1–BUS8 ...........Bus Out 1–8 Cascade

Outs

• CAS AUX1–AUX8..........Aux Out 1–8 Cascade

Outs

• CAS ST-L/ST-R ...............Stereo Out Cascade Outs

• CASSOLOL/CASSOLOR ..Solo Channel Cascade

Outs

2. Use the cursor buttons to move the cur-

sor to a patch parameter (

1) you wish to

change, and rotate the Parameter wheel

or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to mod-

ify the patching.

3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.

Patching output signals to USB

OUT

By default, the following output signals are assigned to

USB OUT.

• USB OUT1–8 ..... Bus Out 1–8 signals

• USB OUT9–16... Bus Out 1–8 signals

If you want to change or verify this patching, proceed as

follows.

1. Press [PATCH] repeatedly until the fol-

lowing page appears.

The parameter boxes underneath each number

indicate the currently-assigned signal routing. The

meaning of these indicators are explained below.

• – ......................................... No assignment

• BUS1–BUS8..................... Bus Out 1–8 signals

• AUX1–AUX8................... Aux Out 1–8 signals

• ST L/R ............................... Stereo Out signals

• INS CH1–INS CH32..... Input Channels 1–32

Insert Outs

• INS BUS1–INS BUS8.... Bus Out 1–8 Insert Outs

• INS AUX1–INS AUX8.. Aux Out 1–8 Insert Outs

• INS ST-L/ST-R................ Stereo Out Insert Outs

2. Move the cursor to a parameter box, and

use the Parameter wheel (or

[INC]/[DEC]) to modify the patching.

3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.

Tip: To restore the default patching, recall Output Patch

memory #00.

Tutorial 31

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Tutorial

This chapter describes operations on the 01V96i, orga-

nized according to their purpose.

Input and Output

Patching

The 01V96i allows you to freely connect external

input/output connectors to the inputs and outputs of

the internal mixer. The procedure is as follows.

Input Patching

1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] but-

ton repeatedly until the Patch | In Patch

page page appears.

By default, signals from the instruments or mics

connected to INPUT connectors 1–16 are sent to

Input Channels 1–16. Input signals from the ADAT

IN connector are sent to Input Channels 17–24, and

input signals from the slot are sent to Input Chan-

nels 25–32.

2. Move the cursor to the parameter box of

the input channel for which you want to

change the assignment, and use the

Parameter wheel or the [INC]/[DEC] but-

tons to modify the patching.

3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.

Output Patching

1. Press the [PATCH] button repeatedly

until the Patch | Out Patch page appears.

By default, the patching will be as shown in the

illustration.

2. As you did when making input patch set-

tings, move the cursor to the parameter

box of the output channel, and use the

Parameter wheel or the [INC]/[DEC] but-

tons to modify the patching.

3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change.

Note: Alternatively, you can move the cursor to the

input channel’s parameter box and then press

[ENTER], and make a selection in the “PATCH

SELECT” box. In this case, select the desired input con-

nector and channel number, and press [INC] to con-

firm the change.

32 Tutorial

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Setting the Input Levels

The explanation here provides an example of adjusting

the input level of the signals from instruments or mics

connected to INPUT connectors, with the input patch-

ing in the default state.

1. While the musicians play the instruments

or devices connected to the INPUT con-

nector, adjust each [PAD] and [GAIN] so

that [PEAK] flickers briefly when the max-

imum volume occurs..

2. Press the LAYER [1–16] button.

Input Channel Layer 1–16 is now available for con-

trol from the channel strip section.

3. Press the FADER MODE [HOME] button,

then press the [F1] button to display the

Meter | CH1-32 page.

Meter pages are the start point for mixing and

recording. They display channel input and output

levels, and compressor and gate gain reduction

amounts. The CH1-32 page enables you to view

Input Channel 1–32 levels and compressor and gate

gain reduction amounts.

4. Make sure that the LEVEL button (1) is

turned on in the METER MODE section.

The METER MODE section enables you to select

the type of signals displayed on the meters. If any

button other than the LEVEL button is turned on,

move the cursor to the LEVEL button, then press

[ENTER].

5. Move the cursor to the POSITION param-

eter box (

2) to the right of the LEVEL

button, rotate the Parameter wheel or

press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select

“POST FADER,” then press [ENTER].

The POSITION parameter indicates the metering

position. When “POST FADER” is selected, the

meters indicate the post-fader signal levels.

6. Make sure that the [ON] button of the

corresponding channel is on (lit), and

raise the fader to the 0 dB position.

7. While the musicians play the musical

instruments, check the input channel lev-

els using the level meters on the display.

Note: The [GAIN] controls adjust the analog input

sensitivity. To make a high-quality recording with a

wide dynamic range and little noise, set the [GAIN]

controls as high as possible while avoiding clipping.

Note: Since the fader and [ON] button positions of

each layer are memorized, those positions for the cor-

responding layer are restored when you switch to that

layer.

Note: If you set the POSITION parameter to “PRE

EQ,” the pre-EQ input levels are metered. If you set the

parameter to “PRE FADER,” the post-EQ and

pre-fader input levels are metered.

Note: If the meters reach the “OVER” level, make sure

that the faders are set to 0dB, then lower the corre-

sponding [GAIN] controls.

Pairing Channels 33

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Tutorial

Pairing Channels

On the 01V96i, you can pair adjacent odd-even chan-

nels for stereo operation. Faders and most mix param-

eters of paired channels (excluding the Input Patch,

phase, routing, and pan parameters) are linked. Pairing

Input Channels is useful when you are connecting ste-

reo sources, such as a CD player or synthesizer.

1. To pair adjacent odd-even Input Chan-

nels, press and hold the [SEL] button for

one of the channels you wish to pair, and

press the [SEL] button for the adjacent

channel.

The corresponding two channels are paired, and the

settings (such as faders, channel on/off, etc.) of the

first channel are copied to the second channel. Sub-

sequently, adjusting the linked parameters of one of

the paired channels will adjust the parameters of its

partner in the same way.

2. To cancel a pair, press and hold the [SEL]

button for one of the paired channels,

and press the [SEL] button for the other

channel.

Setting the Routing

To record the 01V96i input signals to an external

device, you must specify the destination of the signals

for each Input Channel. This process is called “routing.”

There are two routing methods.

• Using Bus Outs 1–8

Input Channel signals are first routed to Buses 1–8,

then through Bus Outs 1–8 to the output connec-

tors or channels. Use this method if you want to mix

the signals of multiple Input Channels for output. If

you desire, you can process the signals using the Bus

Out 1–8 compressors and EQs.

In the following example, Input Channel signals are

routed through Bus Outs 1 and 2 to ADAT OUT

connectors 1 and 2.

•Using Direct Outs

Each Input Channel signal is directly routed to and

output from the specified output connectors and

channels.

The following example illustrates the signals

directly output from ADAT OUT channels 1–5.

Tip: You can still select one of the paired channels for

control by pressing the corresponding [SEL] button.

When you select the channel, the [SEL] button indica-

tor lights up, and the [SEL] button for the paired part-

ner flashes.

Note: If you want to operate the faders of paired chan-

nels, make sure you operate only one fader for the pair.

If you try to operate the faders for both channels in the

pair, an excessive load will be applied to the fader

motor, causing malfunction.

Parameters are

copied.

SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL

INPUT

connector 1

Input

Channels 1

CH 1

ADAT OUT

connector

Bus Out 1

INPUT

connector 2

Bus Out 2

INPUT

connector 3

Bus Out 3

INPUT

connector 4

Bus Out 4

INPUT

connector 5

Bus Out 5

CH 2

Input

Patch

Input

Channels 2

Input

Channels 3

Input

Channels 4

Input

Channels 4

INPUT

connector 1

Input

Channels 1

CH 1

ADAT OUT

connector

INPUT

connector 2

INPUT

connector 3

INPUT

connector 4

INPUT

connector 5

CH 2

Input

Patch

Input

Channels 2

Input

Channels 3

Input

Channels 4

Input

Channels 4

CH 3

CH 4

CH 5

34 Tutorial

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

This section describes how to route signals by combin-

ing the above two routing methods.

1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUT-

ING] button repeatedly to display the

Pan/Route | Rout1-16 page.

This page enables you to select a Bus Out as the sig-

nal destination for each channel.

This page contains the following buttons:

1 1–8 buttons

These buttons route Input Channel signals to Buses

1–8. You can select multiple buttons.

2 S button

This button routes Input Channel signals to the Ste-

reo Bus.

3 D button

This button routes Input Channel signals to the

specified output connectors and channels directly.

2. Move the cursor to the S but-

ton for the Input Channel to

which the musical instrument

or microphone is connected,

then press [ENTER] to turn it

off.

By default, each Input Channel is

routed to the Stereo Bus, which

enables you to monitor the signals from the MON-

ITOR OUT connectors and the PHONES jack.

However during multitrack recording, or when

monitoring the sound with the DAW’s effects

applied, you will usually want to monitor the signals

returned from the recorder or DAW rather than the

input signals themselves. To do so, you must turn

off the S button so that the Input Channel signals

will not be sent to the Stereo Bus.

3. To route Input Channel signals via Buses

1–8 to your recorder or DAW, use the 1–8

buttons to specify a Bus Out as the desti-

nation for each Input Channel to which

an instrument or mic is connected.

In this example, Input Channels 1–4 are assigned to

Buses 1 and 2, and Input Channels 5–8 are assigned

to Buses 3 and 4.

4. Press the [PAN/ROUTING] button

repeatedly to display the Pan/Route | Pan

page.

This page enables you to set the panpots for signals

routed from the Input Channels to the Stereo Bus,

and for signals routed from the Input Channels to

the odd-even buses.

5. Move the cursor to the PAN parameter

controls for the Input Channels that are

assigned to the odd-even buses, then

rotate the Parameter wheel or press the

[INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the pan.

6. To route Input Channel signals to Direct

Outs, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH]

button repeatedly until the Patch | Direct

Out page appears.

The Direct Out page enables you to specify the out-

put connectors or channels to which each Input

Channel is directly patched.

Tip: You can also use the [SEL] buttons to select Input

Channels, and the SELECTED CHANNEL [PAN]

control to adjust the pan setting.

Cursor on

the PAN

parameter

control

EQ’ing the Input Signals 35

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Tutorial

7. Move the cursor to the parameter box for

the Input Channels you want to route to

Direct Outs, then specify the output con-

nectors or channels.

In this example, Input Channel 9–12 signals are

routed to ADAT OUT channels 5–8.

8. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUT-

ING] button repeatedly until the

Pan/Route | Rout1-16 page appears.

9. Move the cursor to the D button for the

Input Channels you want to route to

Direct Outs, then press [ENTER].

The Input Channels for which the D

buttons are turned on are directly

patched to the output connectors or

channels specified in Step 7.

EQ’ing the Input Signals

The 01V96i’s Input Channels feature 4-band full para-

metric EQ. This section describes how to use the EQ of

an Input Channel to adjust the tonal character.

1. Press the LAYER [1–16] button.

Input Channel Layer 1–16 is now available for con-

trol from the channel strip section.

2. Press the [SEL] button for the Input

Channel to which you want to apply EQ.

3. Press the [EQ] button, then the [F1] but-

ton to display the EQ | EQ Edit page.

The EQ Edit page enables you to adjust the EQ

parameters for the currently-selected channel.

4. Make sure that the EQ ON button (in the

upper-left corner) is turned ON.

The EQ ON/OFF button turns the cur-

rently-selected Input Channel’s EQ on or off. If the

button is off, press the [ENTER] button to turn it

on.

5. While sound is being produced on the

instrument or other device, adjust the EQ

parameters.

To do so, move the cursor to the parameters in the

lower half of the page, then rotate the Parameter

wheel to change the values. You can adjust the fol-

lowing parameters for the LOW, L-MID, H-MID,

and HIGH bands individually.

•Q

This parameter control specifies the Q (slope) for

cut/boost of the center frequency set via the F

parameter control. The setting range is between 10

and 0.10. The higher the value, the steeper the slope

becomes. This parameter control also selects the

type of EQ for the LOW and HIGH band.

36 Tutorial

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

•F (Frequency)

This parameter control specifies the center fre-

quency for cut/boost, with a setting range of

21.2 Hz to 20.0 kHz.

•G (Gain)

This parameter control specifies the cut/boost

amount in the range of –18.0 dB to +18.0 dB. The

LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter

on/off controls when Q is set to HPF and LPF

respectively.

You can also press the buttons

([HIGH], [HIGH-MID],

[LOW-MID], [LOW]) in the

SELECTED CHANNEL sec-

tion to select the desired band

and use the rotary controls

([Q], [FREQUENCY],

[GAIN]) to directly edit the Q,

F, an d G p ar ameters .

6. In the same way, adjust the EQ for the

other channels.

Using the EQ Library

EQ settings can be recalled from the EQ library. EQ

library memory numbers 1–40 contain preset EQ set-

tings (programs) suitable for commonly-used instru-

ments, allowing you to work efficiently.

1. Press the LAYER [1–16] button.

Input Channel Layer 1–16 is now available for con-

trol from the channel strip section.

2. Press the [SEL] button for the Input

Channel to which you want to apply EQ.

3. Press the [EQ] button, then the [F2] but-

ton to display the EQ | EQ Library page.

4. Rotate the Parameter wheel to scroll the

library title list, and select a program that

you want to recall.

The selected program appears inside the dotted

box.

5. Move the cursor to the RECALL button

located to the left of the library title list,

then press [ENTER].

The selected program is recalled.

6. Press the [F1] button to display the EQ |

EQ Edit page.

Adjust the parameters as desired.

Tip:

• Turn the Q parameter control for the LOW band

clockwise all the way to set the LOW-band EQ to “L.

SHELF” (low-shelving), and counter-clockwise all

the way to set it to “HPF” (high-pass filter).

• Turn the Q parameter control for the HIGH band

clockwise all the way to set the HIGH-band EQ to

“H. SHELF” (high-shelving), and counter-clockwise

all the way to set it to “LPF” (low-pass filter).

• By default, the LOW band is set to “L. SHELF,” and

the HIGH band is set to “H. SHELF.”

Tip: The meters in the upper-right corner of the page

indicate the post-EQ signal levels of the cur-

rently-selected Input Channel. If these meters reach the

“OVER” position, lower the pre-EQ signal level using

the ATT. parameter control located in the upper-left on

the page.

HIGH

HIGH-MID

LOW-MID

LOW

FREQUENCY

GAIN

Compressing the Input Signals 37

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Tutorial

Compressing the Input

Signals

The 01V96i’s Input Channels 1–32 feature individual

channel compressors. A compressor is an effect used to

make the volume level more consistent, or to restrain

the maximum level in order to raise the overall volume.

Here we describe how to use a compressor to process an

input signal.

1. Press the LAYER [1–16] button.

Input Channel Layer 1–16 is now available for con-

trol from the channel strip section.

2. Press the [SEL] button of the Input Chan-

nel to which you want to apply compres-

sion.

3. Press the [DYNAMICS] button, then

press the [F4] button.

The Dynamics | Comp Lib page appears. This page

enables you to store compressor settings (pro-

grams) to the Compressor library, and recall com-

pressor programs from the library. This example

uses one of the compressor programs 1–36 from the

Compressor library.

4. Rotate the Parameter wheel to scroll the

library title list, and select a program that

you want to recall.

The selected program appears inside the dotted

box.

5. Move the cursor to the RECALL button

located to the left of the library title list,

then press [ENTER].

The selected program is recalled.

6. Press the [F3] button.

The 01V96i displays the Dynamics | Comp Edit

page, which enables you to adjust compressor

parameters.

7. Press the [ENTER] button to turn on the

ON/OFF button located in the lower-left

corner of the page.

The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected

Input Channel’s compressor on or off.

8. While sound is being produced on the

instrument or other device, adjust the

parameters of the compressor.

To do so, move the cursor to the desired parameter

in the PARAMETER section on the page, then

rotate the Parameter wheel or press the

[INC]/[DEC] buttons.

Input Channels 1–32 feature a gate that can be used

independently of the compressor. To use the gate,

first press the [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F2]

button to access the Gate library. After you recall a

gate program, press the [Dynamics] button, then

the [F1] button to display the Gate Edit page, which

enables you to adjust gate parameters.

Tip:

• The 01V96i features four types of dynamics proces-

sors: COMP (Compressor), EXPAND (Expander),

COMP. (S) (Compander Soft), and COMP. (H)

(Compander Hard). These processors feature differ-

ent parameters. (See the Reference Manual for the

parameters for each compressor type.)

• You cannot change the compressor type on the

Comp Edit page. To change the compressor type,

recall a program that uses the desired compressor

type from the Compressor library, then adjust the

parameters as desired.

38 Tutorial

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Using the Internal Effects

The 01V96i features four internal multi-effects proces-

sors that can be used via Aux Sends and Returns or by

inserting them into specific channels. This section

describes how to use internal Effects processor 1 via

Aux Send 1, and apply reverb to the track signals.

1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] but-

ton repeatedly until the Patch | Effect

page appears.

This page enables you to patch the inputs and out-

puts of Effects processors 1–4. By default, Aux Send

1 is patched to the input of Effects processor 1, and

the output of Effects processor 1 is patched to ST IN

Channel 1 L and R, as shown in the diagram above.

2. Make sure that the [ON] button for ST IN

Channel 1 in the ST IN section is turned

on.

3. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [EFFECT] but-

ton repeatedly until the Effect | FX1 Lib

page appears.

The Effect | FX1 Lib page enables you to recall effect

programs to be used by Effects processor 1 from the

Effects library, and store the current effects settings

of Effects processor 1 to the Effects library.

Select from the list in the center column a program

memory to which you wish to store the effects set-

tings, or a program memory that you wish to recall.

The selected program appears inside the dotted

box.

4. Rotate the Parameter wheel and select

“2. Reverb Room”

Here we’ll use room reverb as an example.

5. Move the cursor to the

RECALL button located

to the left of the list,

then press [ENTER].

Effect program “Reverb

Room” is loaded into Effects

processor 1.

6. press the [EFFECT] button repeatedly

until the Effect | FX1 Edit page appears.

Adjust the parameters as desired.

7. Press the LAYER [1–16] button.

Input Channel Layer 1–16 is selected for control

from the channel strip section.

Tip: If the patch for internal Effects processor 1 is dif-

ferent from the above, use the Parameter wheel or

[INC]/[DEC] buttons, and the [ENTER] button to

change the patch.

Recording to DAW Software via the USB Port 39

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Tutorial

8. Press the FADER MODE [AUX1] button.

The button indicator lights up.

While the [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] button indicators are

lit, faders 1–16 control the Aux 1–8 send levels.

In this example, the faders control the send level of

the signals routed from Input Channels 1–16 to Aux

1 (Effects processor 1 input).

9. While sound is being produced on the

instrument or other device, use faders

1–16 to adjust the send level of the signal

sent from each Input Channel to Effect 1.

10.

To adjust the effect return level, use the

rotary level control located on the left

side of the ST IN section on the top panel.

You can view the current level in the upper-right

corner of the display.

Recording to DAW

Software via the USB Port

This chapter explains how the signals being input to the

01V96i can be sent via USB and be recorded into DAW

software running on your computer.

There are two methods of recording via the USB port

into DAW software on your computer.

Recording Bus Outs 1–8

In this method, the Input Channel signals are first sent

to buses 1–8 and then routed to Bus Outs 1–8 and sent

to USB OUT. Use this method if you want to mix the

signals of multiple Input Channels and stereo-record

them. If necessary, you can use the compressors and EQ

of Bus Outs 1–8 to process the signals.

Here’s the procedure for recording Bus Outs 1/2 via

USB to a stereo track of your DAW.

1. Use a USB cable to connect your com-

puter to the 01V96i.

2. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] but-

ton repeatedly until the Patch | USB Out

page appears.

Tip: To reset the fader 1–16 function to normal mode,

press the FADER MODE [HOME] button.

Note: You must have installed the Yamaha Steinberg USB

Driver on your computer.

The Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver can be downloaded

from the following website. For details on installation, refer

to the installation guide included in the download file.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

Tip: The Input Channels that you want to record must be

assigned to Bus Outs 1/2. For details on how to do this, refer

to “Setting the Routing” on page 33.

40 Tutorial

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

3. Make sure that USB1 is assigned to BUS1,

and USB2 is assigned to BUS2.

If the settings are otherwise, use the Parameter

wheel (or [INC]/[DEC]) and [ENTER] to change

the settings.

4. Start up your DAW, and set it to use the

Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver.

If you’re using the Cubase AI, set the following

items.

• From the menu bar, choose “Devices” → “Device

Settings,” then click VST Audio System. As the

ASIO driver, choose “Yamaha Steinberg USB

ASIO” (Windows) / “Yamaha 01V96i” (Mac).

• From the “Device” menu, choose “VST Connec-

tions.” In the Input tab choose [Add Bus], set “Con-

figuration” to Stereo and “Number” to 1, and click

[OK] to create a new stereo input. For the newly

created “Stereo In,” set the device port to “01V96i

1/2” (Windows) / “01V96i 1” and “01V96i 2”

(Mac).

For details on other DAW settings, refer to the

owner’s manual of your DAW.

5. Create a stereo track in your DAW.

6. Select 01V96i 1/2 as the input port of the

stereo track.

If you’re using Cubase AI, select the name of the

input port that you created in step 4 (by default this

will be “Stereo In”).

7. Enable recording for the track that you

want to record, and start recording.

8. When you’ve finished recording, stop the

DAW.

Recording Direct Outputs

In this method, each Input Channel is recorded directly

to your DAW. Use this method if you want to record the

signals of multiple Input Channels each to their own

track. This is convenient when you’re making a live

recording that you will be mixing later. Here we’ll

explain the procedure for recording Input Channels

1–16 directly to DAW tracks 1–16.

1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] but-

ton repeatedly until the Patch | Direct

Out page appears.

2. Move the cursor to the parameter box for

the Input Channels you want to route to

Direct Outs, then specify the output con-

nectors or channels.

Move the cursor to the parameter box, and use the

Parameter wheel (or [INC]/[DEC] to specify the

patching. Assign 1–16 to USB1–USB16.

3. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS

[PAN/ROUTING] button

repeatedly until the

Pan/Route | Rout1-16 page

appears.

Signals of the Input Channels whose

D button is turned on will be sent

directly to the USB OUT that you

specified in step 2.

4. Start up your DAW, and set it to use the

Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver.

If you’re using the Cubase AI, set the following

items.

• From the menu bar, choose “Devices” → “Device

Settings,” then click VST Audio System. As the

ASIO driver, choose “Yamaha Steinberg USB

ASIO” (Windows) / “Yamaha 01V96i” (Mac).

• From the “Device” menu, choose “VST Connec-

tions.” In the Input tab, choose [Add Bus], set “Con-

figuration” to Mono and “Number” to 16, and click

[OK] to create sixteen new monaural inputs. For

each newly created “Mono In 1–16,” set the device

port to “01V96i 1–16” respectively.

For details on other DAW settings, refer to the

owner’s manual of your DAW.

5. Create a stereo track in your DAW.

6. Select 01V96i 1–16 respectively as the

input port for each monaural track.

If you’re using Cubase AI, select the name of the

input ports you created in step 4 (by default these

will be Mono In 1–16).

7. Enable recording for all of the tracks that

you want to record, and start recording.

8. W he n yo u ’ ve f i n is h ed r ec o r di n g, s to p th e

DAW.

Adjusting the Monitor Levels from the DAW 41

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Tutorial

Adjusting the Monitor

Levels from the DAW

The audio being played back from the DAW can be

returned to the 01V96i’s Input Channels and moni-

tored via the MONITOR OUT jacks or PHONES jack.

Normally, the signal of the DAW’s stereo bus is sent to

an 01V96i Input Channel for monitoring. However

when overdubbing, you might need to monitor with a

balance that’s different than the mix balance of the

song. In this situation, the signal from each DAW track

can be returned to a separate Input Channel, and the

balance adjusted on the 01V96i. Here we’ll explain the

procedure for sending the signals of DAW tracks 1–8 to

the 01V96i’s Input Channels 17–24 and adjusting the

monitor levels.

1. Use a USB cable to connect your com-

puter to the 01V96i.

2. Start up your DAW, and set it to use the

Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver.

If you’re using the Cubase AI, set the following

items.

• From the menu bar, choose “Devices” → “Device

Settings,” then click VST Audio System. As the

ASIO driver, choose “Yamaha Steinberg USB

ASIO” (Windows) / “Yamaha 01V96i” (Mac).

• From the “Device” menu, choose “VST Connec-

tions.” In the Input tab, choose [Add Bus], set “Con-

figuration” to Mono and “Number” to 8, and click

[OK] to create sixteen new monaural inputs. For

each newly created “Mono Out 1–8,” set the device

port to “01V96i 1–8” respectively.

For details on other DAW settings, refer to the

owner’s manual of your DAW.

3. In the DAW, select “01V96i 1–8” respec-

tively as the output port of tracks 1–8.

If you’re using Cubase AI, select the name of the

output ports you created in step 2 (by default these

will be Mono Out 1–8).

4. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] but-

ton repeatedly until the Patch | In Patch

page appears.

5. Move the cursor to INPUT 17–24, and use

the Parameter wheel (or [INC]/[DEC]) to

select USB IN 1–8 respectively.

6. Press the LAYER [17–32] button.

Input Channel Layer 17–32 is selected for control

from the channel strip section.

7. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUT-

ING] button repeatedly until the

Pan/Route | Rout17-STI page appears.

8. For each Input Channel 17–24, make sure

that the S button is on and the 1–8 but-

tons are off, and use the PAN section to

adjust the panning of the monitor signals

as necessary.

Tip: Controlling Input Channel 17–32 Pan settings,

faders, and the [ON] buttons will affect the monitoring

signal, but will not affect the signal recorded to the

DAW.

42 Tutorial

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

9. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [HOME] but-

ton, then press the [F1] button to display

the Meter | CH1-32 page.

10.

Make sure that [ON] button indicators

1–8 are steadily lit, then raise the [STE-

REO] fader to 0 dB.

11.

Play back the DAW, and adjust faders 1–8,

[MONITOR OUT], and [PHONES] to set

an appropriate level for the monitor sig-

nals.

Now you can monitor via the monitoring system

and headphones the signals sent from Input Chan-

nels 17–24 to the Stereo Bus.

Using Scene Memories

Scene memories enable you to name and store snap-

shots of the 01V96i’s mix parameters, internal effect

processor settings, remote layers, and input/output

patch settings.

You can store 99 Scene memories, and recall any Scene

by using the display pages or the controls on the top

panel.

Here’s how to use the top panel keys to recall a Scene.

1. Adjust the mix parameters on the 01V96i

to the conditions you wish to store as a

Scene.

2. Press the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] or

Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene

memory number.

If you select a Scene memory other than the cur-

rently-recalled Scene, its number flashes at the to of

the display.

Scene memories #U (“Ud”) and #0 (“00”) are spe-

cial read-only memories, to which you cannot store

Scenes. Also, you cannot store Scenes to write-pro-

tected Scene memories.

3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] but-

ton.

The Title Edit window appears, which enables you

to name the Scene to be stored.

4. Enter the title, move the cursor to the OK

button, then press [ENTER].

The Title Edit window closes and the current Scene

is stored to the selected Scene memory.

5. To recall a Scene, press the SCENE MEM-

ORY Up [ ] or Down [ ] buttons to

select a Scene memory number, then

press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] but-

ton.

Tip: If the L & R level meters reach the “OVER” posi-

tion, lower the [STEREO] fader.

Changing the Channel Names 43

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Tutorial

Changing the Channel

Names

You can change the default name of the input channels

(Input Channels 1–32, ST IN Channels 1–4) and output

channels (Aux Outs 1–8, Bus Outs 1–8, Stereo Out), if

you desire.

Changing the Input Channel

Names

1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] but-

ton repeatedly until the Patch| In Name

page appears.

Channel IDs, Short names, and Long names are

listed from left to right on the page. You can specify

Short names in the parameter boxes (

1) in the

center column, and Long names in the parameter

boxes (

2) in the right column.

2. Move the cursor to the desired parame-

ter box, then use the Parameter wheel or

the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a port

for which you want to change the name.

3. Press [ENTER].

The Title Edit window appears, which enables you

to edit the name.

4. Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK

button, then press [ENTER].

The new name is now effective.

When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (

3) is

on, the first four characters of a newly-entered Long

name are automatically copied to the Short name.

On the other hand, a newly-entered Short name is

automatically added to the beginning of the Long

name.

You can reset all port names to their default names

by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button,

then pressing [ENTER].

Changing the Output Channel

Names

To change output channel names, press the DISPLAY

ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch |

Out Name page appears.

The procedure for editing the names and using the

Name Input Auto Copy check box and the INITIALIZE

button is the same as on the In Name page.

13 2

Tip: The edited name is stored in the Input Patch

library.

44 Tutorial

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Creating a Custom Layer

by Combining Channels

(User Assignable Layer)

If you set the Remote Layer target to “USER ASSIGN-

ABLE,” you can create a custom layer by combining any

01V96i channels (excluding the Stereo Out). This cus-

tom layer is called “User Assignable layer.”

1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP]

button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup|

Remote page appears.

2. Set the TARGET parameter to USER

ASSIGNABLE, then press [ENTER].

A confirmation window appears.

3. Move the cursor to the YES button, then

press [ENTER].

The 01V96i displays the page shown below.

4. Select the channels you wish to assign to

the User Assignable layer using the 1–16

parameter boxes (

1).

You can store up to four 16-channel setups in four

banks by switching Banks 1–4 via the BANK 1–4

buttons. If you press[ENTER] before selecting the

channels to assign, you will still be able to select the

channels you wish to assign in the User CH Select

window.

5. Use the LAYER [REMOTE] button to

assign or recall the User Assignable layer.

You can use the faders and [ON] buttons to control

the assigned channels.

Tip: You can reset the assignment to default by moving

the cursor to the CLEAR button and pressing

[ENTER].

Using the Oscillator 45

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Tutorial

Using the Oscillator

The 01V96i features an Oscillator you can use for

sound checks. Follow the steps below to use the Oscil-

lator:

1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] but-

ton repeatedly until the Utility | Oscillator

page appears.

This page contains the following parameters:

1 OSCILLATOR ON

This parameter button turns the Oscillator on or

off.

2 WAVEFORM

These parameter buttons select the Oscillator wave-

forms.

3 LEVEL section

The parameter control in this section sets the Oscil-

lator output level.

4 ASSIGN section

The buttons in this section select the Oscillator out-

put.

2. Move the cursor to the button for the

Oscillator output channel in the ASSIGN

section, then press [ENTER] (you can

select multiple channels).

3. Move the cursor to one of the WAVE-

FORM parameter buttons, then press

[ENTER].

You can select the following waveforms:

• SINE 100Hz ........100 Hz sinewave

• SINE 1kHz...........1 kHz sinewave

• SINE 10kHz ........10 kHz sinewave

• PINK NOISE ......Pink noise

• BURST NOISE ...Burst noise (200 msec pink noise

pulses at four second intervals)

4. Move the cursor to the parameter con-

trol in the LEVEL section, then rotate the

Parameter wheel to set the Oscillator

level to minimum.

5. Move the cursor to the OSCILLATOR

ON/OFF button, then press the [ENTER]

or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to turn on the

Oscillator.

The Oscillator signal is now routed to the channels

selected in the ASSIGN section.

6. Move the cursor to the parameter con-

trol in the LEVEL section, then rotate the

Parameter wheel to raise the Oscillator

level.

You can view the current Oscillator level on the

LEVEL meter.

1 3

2 4

Note: Sinewave and pink noise create unusually high

sound pressure. Oscillator levels that are too high can

damage the speakers. When you use the Oscillator, be

sure to set the level to minimum, then raise the level

gradually.

46 Tutorial

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Using the User Defined

Keys

You can assign any of more than 160 functions to the

USER DEFINED KEYS [1]–[8] buttons.

If you assign to one of the buttons (or “keys”) a function

that is usually executed on the display pages, you can

use the assigned button as a shortcut.

The Function to User Defined Keys assignments are

stored in banks. Each bank accommodates an assign-

ment of all eight buttons. The 01V96i provides eight

banks (Banks A–H). Switching banks enables you to

change the assignment quickly.

Follow the steps below to assign functions to the USER

DEFINED KEYS.

1. Press the USER ACCESS [UTILITY] button

to locate the Utility | User Def page.

This page contains the following parameters:

1 INITIALIZE

This button resets the contents of all banks to their

initial settings.

2 BANK

These buttons select the desired banks.

3 TITLE

This parameter displays the name of the bank

selected by the BANK parameter button. Move the

cursor to the TITLE parameter box, then press

[ENTER]. The Title Edit window appears, enabling

you to enter a name.

4 1–8

These parameter boxes enable you to assign func-

tions to USER DEFINED KEYS [1]–[8].

2. Move the cursor to the desired BANK

parameter button, then press [ENTER].

The corresponding bank is selected, and the func-

tions assigned to the User Defined buttons in that

bank are displayed in the 1–8 parameter boxes.

3. Move the cursor to one of the 1–8 param-

eter boxes, then press [ENTER].

The 01V96i displays the User Define Select win-

dow, which enables you to assign functions to the

selected buttons.

4. Move the cursor to the left column, then

rotate the Parameter wheel or press the

[INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a function

you wish to assign.

A function is selected when it appears inside the

dotted box. See the Reference Manual for a com-

plete list of assignable functions.

5. In the same way, set the center and right

column.

The items that appear in the center and right col-

umns vary depending on the function selected in

Step 4.

6. To close the window, move the cursor to

the YES button, then press [ENTER].

When the window closes, the specified function is

assigned to the selected User Defined button.

To cancel the assignment, move the cursor to the

CANCEL button, then press [ENTER].

7. If you assigned functions that require

numbers (such as recalling a Scene or

library memory), move the cursor to the

extra parameter box shown on the right

and specify the number.

1 23

Tip: When you select a function that is executed based

on specified numbers (for example, a function that

recalls a specific Scene or library memory or transmits

MIDI messages), an extra parameter box appears on

the right, in which you must specify the number.

Using Operation Lock 47

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Tutorial

Using Operation Lock

The 01V96i features an Operation Lock function that

prevents unintentional edits and restricts access to

panel operation with a password.

To use the Operation Lock function, press the [UTIL-

ITY] button repeatedly to display the Utility | Lock

page.

This page contains the following parameters:

1 OPERATION LOCK

This button enables or cancels Operation Lock.

When you turn on this button, the Password win-

dow appears.

Enter a four-letter password using the Channel

1–10 [SEL] buttons (Channel 10 [SEL] button

enters “0”). (The password characters are repre-

sented by asterisks.) Move the cursor to the OK but-

ton, then press [ENTER] to enable Operation Lock.

The factory default password is “1234.”

To cancel Operation Lock, press [ENTER]. The

Password window appears again. Enter the pass-

word and select the OK button. Operation Lock is

cancelled.

2 OPERATION LOCK SAFE section

This section enables you to select certain controls

on the panel to exclude from Operation Lock. To

cancel all “safe” buttons simultaneously, move the

cursor to the CLEAR ALL button, then press

[ENTER].

Tip: The 01V96i’s settings can be saved on the hard

disk of your computer by using Studio Manager soft-

ware. We strongly recommend that you back up

important data. Studio Manager can be downloaded

from the following website.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

Note: If you forget the password, you cannot cancel

Operation Lock. Be sure to write down the password.

31 2

48 Tutorial

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

3 PASSWORD

This button enables you to change the current pass-

word. Move the cursor to the PASSWORD button,

then press [ENTER]. The Set Password window

appears, enabling you to change the password.

Enter the current password in the PASSWORD

field, and a new password in the NEW PASS-

WORD field. The factory default password is

“1234.” Enter the new password again in the

REENTRY field located below the NEW PASS-

WORD field. Move the cursor to the OK button,

then press [ENTER] to change the password.

Initializing

You can delete all currently-recorded settings and

restore the factory-preset values, and reset the Opera-

tion Lock password to its initial setting. Follow the steps

below.

1. Make sure that the power to the 01V96i

is turned off.

2. While holding down the SCENE MEM-

ORY [STORE] button, turn on the POWER

ON/OFF switch.

After a moment, the 01V96i displays the following

confirmation window.

3. To reset the 01V96i to factory default set-

tings, move the cursor to the INITIALIZE

button, then press [ENTER].

To cancel the initialization operation, move the cur-

sor to the CANCEL button, then press [ENTER].

When the internal data is thoroughly overwritten,

the 01V96i restarts using the factory settings.

4. To reset the Operation Lock password to

its initial setting, in Step 2, move the cur-

sor to the PASSWORD button, then press

[ENTER].

The password is reset to “1234.”

If you do not take any action after the confirmation

window appears, the window automatically closes and

the 01V96i restarts without being initialized.

Tip: To clear the registered password, move the cursor

to the CLEAR button, then press [ENTER].

If you’ve forgotten the password you specified, you can

clear the password by initializing the 01V96i to its fac-

tory-set state.

Note:

• If you initialize the 01V96i to the factory-preset values,

all Scene, library and other data you stored previously

will be erased. Proceed with caution.

• If you want to keep the current internal data, be sure to

first back up the data using the Studio Manager soft-

ware.

Troubleshooting 49

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Troubleshooting

Power won’t turn on, panel LEDs or

LCD won’t light

❍ Are the LCD contrast and panel brightness set appropriately?

❍ Is the POWER switch turned on?

❍ If the power still does not turn on, contact a Yamaha service center listed at the

end of the manual.

Sound is not input

❍ Is the optional I/O card inserted correctly? (see page 18)

❍ Is the signal from the external device being input?

❍ Is the input port patched to an input channel? (see page 29)

❍ Is the GAIN set to an appropriate level? (see page 32)

❍ Is the EQ attenuator raised? (see page 35)

❍ Is an insert turned on even though it is not assigned correctly?

❍ Is the input channel’s [ON] key indicator lit?

❍ Is the input channel’s fader raised?

Sound is not output

❍ Is the optional I/O card inserted correctly? (see page 18)

❍ Is the STEREO channel’s [ON] key indicator lit?

❍ Is the output channel patched to an output port? (see page 31)

Sound is not output from

headphones or MONITOR OUT jacks

❍ Is the [PHONES] knob or [LEVEL] knob set to an appropriate volume?

Insufficient volume

❍ Is the GAIN set to an appropriate level? (see page 32)

❍ Is the input channel’s fader raised?

❍ Could the EQ gain be lowered excessively? (see page 35)

❍ Could the GATE/COMP threshold or ratio be set to an excessive value? (see

page 37)

❍ Is the EQ attenuator raised? (see page 35)

❍ Is the output channel’s fader raised?

❍ Check the levels in each screen of the METER function. (see page 23)

Sound is distorted

❍ Is the wordclock set correctly? (see page 27)

❍ Is the GAIN set to an appropriate level? (see page 32)

❍ Could the input channel’s fader be raised excessively?

❍ Could the STEREO channel’s fader be raised excessively?

❍ Could the EQ or COMP gain be raised excessively?

(see pages 35–37)

Sound is output even though not

patched to an output channel

❍ Could the input channel be set to direct out? (see page 33)

❍ Could insert out be assigned to the output channel?

Operating a fader does not change

the level as expected

❍ Are the correct channels selected in the LAYER section?

Only a specific channel is heard from

the MONITOR OUT or PHONES jack

❍ Could the [CUE] key be on?

Noise is present in an externally

connected recorder or device

❍ Is the wordclock set correctly? (see page 27)

❍ Could an unsynchronized signal be input?

❍ Is the oscillator turned on? (see page 45)

High-frequency range is lacking

❍ Could emphasis be applied? This will occur if the state of the input signal does

not match the emphasis data.

❍ Could EQ be applied? (see page 35)

An input signal is being input, but

there’s no monitor output

❍ Could DIMMER be applied?

❍ Is the routing appropriate for the signal you want to monitor?

Headroom is restricted, particularly

when EQ boost is applied

❍ Use the EQ’s attenuator to reduce the level. (see page 35)

Signal is delayed ❍ Check whether the delay of each channel is set correctly.

Can’t save scene memories or library

data

❍ Could you be attempting to save a read-only scene/library memory, or a pro-

tected scene? (see page 42)

Can’t transmit/receive MIDI data

❍ Is the MIDI PORT selected correctly?

❍ Are the MODE and channel selected correctly on the transmitting and receiving

devices?

❍ Have you assigned an event to the program change?

When a scene is recalled, some

channels/parameters do not update

❍ Could recall safe be specified for those channels/parameters?

When a scene is recalled, it takes time

for the faders to stop

❍ Could a fade time have been specified?

50 Troubleshooting

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Signal level is low at a specific

frequency

❍ Could the EQ gain be excessively low?

❍ Routing a signal through GEQ or an effect will delay it relative to other signals. If

a signal is mixed with the same signal routed differently, a comb filter effect will

decrease the level at specific frequencies.

Can’t control the 01V96i console from

01V96i Editor

❍ Refer to the 01V96i Editor installation guide on the website.

The 01V96i console is not recognized

by your DAW software

❍ Have you downloaded and installed the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver?

❍ You must connect the 01V96i to the computer and power-on the 01V96i before

you start up your DAW software.

❍ Check the driver settings and device settings of your DAW software.

Signals are not recorded on your

DAW software

❍ Are the input ports set appropriately on your DAW software?

❍ If you’re using Cubase, are the VST connection settings appropriate?

❍ Is the signal you want to record being routed to one of USB1–16?

Error messages 51

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Error messages

Message Summary

Memory backup issues

Check Sum Error!

Check sum did not match between shutdown and startup.

A memory backup problem has occurred, perhaps because the battery is low.

Low Battery! The backup battery has run low. Replace the battery.

Low Battery !

Replace Battery !

The battery is low. Replace the battery.

Low Battery !

Factory Preset ? Replace Battery !

The battery is low. Replace the battery.

Battery is Exhausted !

Replace Battery !

The battery is dead. Replace the battery.

Communication issues

MIDI port is not selected!

This will appear if you attempt to execute a bulk dump with the MIDI PORT

unspecified.

Port busy. Try again.

Port Busy occurred while executing a MIDI bulk dump.

Try the operation once again.

TX buffer full. Try again.

TX Buffer Full occurred while executing a MIDI bulk dump.

Try the operation once again.

Work Memory full! Memory could not be allocated for the MIDI bulk dump.

MIDI Framing Error

There was a framing error in the message received at the MIDI port.

Check whether an appropriate device is connected.

MIDI Overrun Error

There was an overrun error in the message received at the MIDI port.

Check whether an appropriate device is connected.

MIDI Parity Error

There was a parity error in the message received at the MIDI port.

Check whether an appropriate device is connected.

MIDI RxBuf. Full

The MIDI port reception buffer has overflowed.

Cause: The amount of data being received is too great, or the system has been

loaded for an extended period of time.

MIDI TxBuf. Full

The MIDI port transmission buffer has overflowed.

Cause: The amount of data being transmitted is too great, or the system has

been loaded for an extended period of time.

SLOT1 Framing Error

There was a framing error in the message received at the SLOT1 serial port.

Check the serial bridge settings of the MY card.

SLOT1 Overrun Error

There was an overrun error in the message received at the SLOT1 serial port.

Check the serial bridge settings of the MY card.

SLOT1 Parity Error

There was a parity error in the message received at the SLOT1 serial port.

Check the serial bridge settings of the MY card.

SLOT1 RxBuf. Full

The SLOT1 serial port reception buffer has overflowed.

Cause: The amount of data being received was too great, or the system has been

loaded for an extended period of time.

SLOT1 TxBuf. Full

The SLOT1 serial port transmission buffer has overflowed.

Cause: The amount of data being transmitted was too great, or the system has

been loaded for an extended period of time.

USB RxBuf. Full

The USB port reception buffer has overflowed.

Cause: The amount of data being received was too great, or the system has been

loaded for an extended period of time.

USB TxBuf. Full

The USB port transmission buffer has overflowed.

Cause: The application on the communicating PC terminated abnormally, etc.

Disconnect and reconnect the cable, and restart the application.

52 Error messages

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

DIO issues

WRONG WORD CLOCK!

The wordclock is incorrect.

Cause: The device assigned as the clock source is not running, or a clock source

to which the 01V96i cannot synchronize has been selected.

Sync Error!(SLOT)

Synchronization has not been achieved with the input signal from the MY slot.

Check the clock source of the connected device.

Sync Error!(2TRD)

Synchronization has not been achieved with the 2TR Digital input signal.

Check the clock source of the connected device.

Sync Error!(ADAT IN)

Synchronization has not been achieved with the ADAT IN input signal.

Check the clock source of the connected device.

Memory store/recall issues

Y56K Couldn’t Store #xx : SLOT(1).

The Y56K/Y96K’s scene #xx could not be stored.

Cause: You selected scene 97 or later.

Y56K Couldn’t Recall #xx : SLOT(1).

The Y56K/Y96K’s scene #xx could not be recalled.

Cause: The scene had not been stored in the Y56K/Y96K, or you selected scene

97 or later.

Channel Library #xx Can’t Recall!

This message appears if you attempt to recall a channel library memory that was

created from a different channel module. For example, this will appear if a library

memory created for an Aux channel is recalled to an Input channel.

Nothing to Undo!

Undo is not possible because there is no data in the undo buffer.

This message will appear if you attempt to recall the undo buffer (#U) without

having executed Store or Recall since the console was powered-on.

Nothing to Paste.

The copy buffer is empty. This message will appear if you attempt to execute

Channel Paste before executing Channel Copy.

Can’t Paste to a Different Channel Type.

You cannot Paste because the channel module is different. For example, this mes-

sage will appear if you copy INPUT Channel 1 and attempt to paste it to AUX1.

For Effect 1,2 Only.

This effect type can be used only with EFFECT 1 and 2. This message will appear

if you attempt to recall HQ.PITCH or FREEZE to EFFECT 3 or 4.

AUX Pair Status Conflicted!

This message will appear if the saved CH Library memory and AUX have different

Pair settings. The library memory has been recalled, but the Pair settings for AUX

have not been reproduced.

Surround Mode Conflicted!

This message will appear if the channel library memory and the Surround Mode

settings are different. The library memory has been recalled, but the AUX pair

settings have not been reproduced.

Output Has No Gate!

This message will appear if you attempt to recall a Gate library memory to an

Output.

Stereo In Has No Gate!

This message will appear if you attempt to recall a Gate library memory to a Ste-

reo In.

Stereo In Has No Comp!

This message will appear if you attempt to recall a Comp library memory to a

Stereo In.

#xx of Scene is Read Only!

#xx of Channel Library is Read Only!

#xx of Gate Library is Read Only!

#xx of Comp Library is Read Only!

#xx of EQ Library is Read Only!

#xx of Effects Library is Read Only!

#xx of Input Patch Library is Read Only!

#xx of Output Patch Library is Read Only!

This message will appear if you attempt to execute an operation such as Store or

Title Edit on a read-only memory.

#xx of Scene is Protected!

This message will appear if you attempt to execute an operation such as Store or

Title Edit on a protected scene.

#xx of Scene is Empty!

#xx of Channel Library is Empty!

#xx of Gate Library is Empty!

#xx of Comp Library is Empty!

#xx of EQ Library is Empty!

#xx of Effects Library is Empty!

#xx of Input Patch Library is Empty!

#xx of Output Patch Library is Empty!

This message will appear if you attempt to recall a scene or library memory in

which no data has been saved

Message Summary

Error messages 53

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Error messages

Panel operation

Not assigned.

This message will appear if you operate a user-defined key to which no function

has been assigned.

This Key doesn’t Work on Current Layer.

This message will appear if you operate a key that is non-functional when using a

remote layer whose target setting is ProTools, Nuendo, Cubase, or General DAW.

Fader calibration data error!

Channel xx,yy,…

A data error has occurred for channel xx,yy,… fader calibration.

Please execute fader calibration.

If this does not solve the problem, please contact a service center.

Patch issues

Currently Patched from Direct Out!

This message will appear if you attempt to change the output patching of an

output port that is assigned to Direct Out while using Direct Out.

This Routing is Ineffective!

Sound will not be output because an invalid Direct Out Patch has been specified.

This message will appear if you turn on a Direct Out that is patched to an output

port corresponding to the even-numbered channel of a double channel when

operating at 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz.

Message Summary

54 Contents of the Reference Manual

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Contents of the

Reference Manual

How to Use This Reference Manual ............................................... 1

Contents of the Owner’s Manual (Booklet) .......... 3

Function Tree .......................................................... 4

Control Surface & Rear Panel ................................. 6

Control Surface .................................................................................. 6

Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 10

Analog I/O & Digital I/O ...................................... 12

Analog Inputs & Outputs ............................................................... 12

Digital Inputs & Outputs ................................................................ 13

Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at I/O Card Inputs

.. 14

Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status .................................... 14

Dithering Digital Outputs .............................................................. 15

Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates ........... 16

Input Channels ...................................................... 17

About Input Channels .................................................................... 17

Setting the Input Channels from the Display .............................. 18

Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface ............... 25

Pairing Input Channels ................................................................... 26

Naming Input Channels ................................................................. 28

Bus Outs ................................................................ 29

About Stereo Out ............................................................................. 29

Bus Out 1–8 ...................................................................................... 29

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display ........ 30

Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Control

Surface ............................................................................... 33

Pairing Buses or Aux Sends ........................................................... 33

Attenuating Output Signals ........................................................... 34

Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs .......................................... 35

Aux Outs ................................................................ 36

Aux Out 1–8 ..................................................................................... 36

Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display ......................................... 36

Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Control Surface ........................... 38

Setting Aux Send Levels .................................................................. 38

Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels .................... 40

Panning Aux Sends ......................................................................... 41

Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends ........................ 42

Input & Output Patching ..................................... 43

Input Patching ................................................................................. 43

Output Patching .............................................................................. 44

Patching Direct Outs ....................................................................... 46

Insert Patching ................................................................................. 47

Monitoring ............................................................ 49

Monitor ............................................................................................. 49

Monitor and Solo Setup .................................................................. 49

Using the Monitor ........................................................................... 50

Using the Solo Function ................................................................. 51

Surround Pan ........................................................ 52

About Surround Pan ....................................................................... 52

Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes .......................... 53

Surround Panning ........................................................................... 56

Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters .......... 59

Grouping & Linking ........................................................................ 59

Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups ........................................ 59

Using Fader Group Master ............................................................ 61

Using Mute Group Master ............................................................. 62

Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters .................................... 62

Internal Effects ..................................................... 64

About the Internal Effects .............................................................. 64

Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends ....................................... 64

Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels ................................ 65

Editing Effects .................................................................................. 66

About Add-On Effects .................................................................... 67

About Plug-Ins ................................................................................. 67

Scene Memories ................................................... 68

About Scene Memories ................................................................... 68

What is Stored in a Scene? .............................................................. 68

About Scene Numbers .................................................................... 68

Storing and Recalling Scenes .......................................................... 69

Auto Scene Memory Update .......................................................... 70

Fading Scenes ................................................................................... 71

Recalling Scenes Safely .................................................................... 72

Sorting Scenes ................................................................................... 72

Copying and Pasting a Scene (Global Paste) ............................... 73

Libraries ................................................................ 74

About the Libraries .......................................................................... 74

General Library Operation ............................................................. 74

Using Libraries ................................................................................. 75

Remote Control .................................................... 83

About Remote Function ................................................................. 83

Pro Tools Remote Layer ................................................................. 83

Nuendo/Cubase Remote Layer ...................................................... 93

Other DAW Remote Layer ............................................................. 94

MIDI Remote Layer ......................................................................... 94

Machine Control Function ............................................................. 98

MIDI .................................................................... 100

MIDI & the 01V96i ........................................................................ 100

MIDI Port Setup ............................................................................ 101

Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall ...... 103

Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control

.. 104

Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes ............. 106

Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump) ....... 107

Other Functions ................................................. 109

Setting Preferences ......................................................................... 109

Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels

(User Assignable Layer) ................................................. 110

Cascading Consoles ....................................................................... 111

Checking the Battery and the System Version .......................... 113

Calibrating the Faders ................................................................... 113

Index ................................................................... 115

Appendix: Parameter Lists .............................. 119

USER DEFINED KEYS ................................................................. 119

USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments ............................. 121

Input Patch Parameters ................................................................ 121

Initial Input Patch Settings ........................................................... 123

Output Patch Parameters ............................................................. 125

Initial Output Patch Settings ........................................................ 127

User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings ..................... 128

Effects Parameters ......................................................................... 132

Effects and tempo synchronization ............................................. 146

Preset EQ Parameters .................................................................... 147

Preset Gate Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) ...................................... 148

Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) ......................... 149

Dynamics Parameters ................................................................... 151

Appendix: MIDI ............................................... 156

Scene Memory to Program Change Table ................................. 156

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table ............................... 157

MIDI Data Format ......................................................................... 173

MIDI Implementation Chart ........... End of Manual

Specifications 55

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Specifications

General Spec

Number of scene memories

Sampling Frequency

Internal

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz

External

USB audio Normal Rate 44.1 kHz ±0.1%

48 kHz ±0.1%

Double Rate 88.2 kHz ±0.1%

96 kHz ±0.1%

The others Normal rate: 44.1 kHz-10% to 48 kHz+6%

Double rate: 88.2 kHz-10% to 96 kHz+6%

Signal Delay

fs=48 kHz

Less than 1.6 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT

fs=96 kHz

Less than 0.8 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT

Fader

100 mm motorized  17

Fader Resolution

+10 to –138, – dB input faders

0 to –138, – dB master faders, stereo fader

Total Harmonic Distortion

(CH INPUT to STEREO OUT)

(Input Gain=Min.)

fs=48 kHz

Less than 0.05% 20 Hz–20 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω

Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +24 dB into 600 Ω

fs=96 kHz

Less than 0.05% 20 Hz–40 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω

Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +24 dB into 600 Ω

Frequency Response

(CH INPUT to STEREO OUT)

fs=48 kHz

20 Hz–20 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω

fs=96 kHz

20 Hz–40 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω

Dynamic Range

(maximum level to noise level)

110 dB typ. DA Converter (STEREO OUT)

105 dB typ. AD+DA (to STEREO OUT) @ fs=48 kHz

105 dB typ. AD+DA (to STEREO OUT) @ fs=96 kHz

Hum & Noise

(20 Hz–20 kHz)

Rs=150 Ω

–128 dB Equivalent Input Noise

–86 dB residual output noise. STEREO OUT (STEREO OUT off)

Input Gain=Max.

Input Pad=0 dB

–86dB (90dB S/N) STEREO OUT

(STEREO fader at nominal level and all CH INPUT faders at minimum level)

Input Pad=0 dB

Input Sensitivity

=–60 dB

–64dB (68dB S/N) STEREO OUT

(STEREO fader at nominal level and one CH INPUT fader at nominal level)

Maximum Voltage Gain

74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–12) to STEREO OUT/OMNI (BUS) OUT

40 dB CH INPUT (CH13–16) to STEREO OUT

74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–12) to OMNI (AUX) OUT (via pre input fader)

74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–12) to MONITOR OUT (via STEREO BUS)

Crosstalk

(@ 1 kHz)

Input Gain=Min.

80 dB adjacent input channels (CH1–12)

80 dB adjacent input channels (CH13–16)

80 dB input to output

AD Input (1–12)

Phantom switch

+48 V DC (each 4ch)

Pad switch

0/20 dB attenuation

Gain control

44 dB (–60 to –16), detented

Peak indicator

LED (red) turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping at dig-

ital domain

Signal indicator

LED (green) turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal at

digital domain

AD converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times over-

sampling (fs=88.2, 96 kHz)

56 Specifications

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

AD Input (13–16)

Gain control

30 dB (–26 to +4), detented

Peak indicator

LED (red) turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping at dig-

ital domain

Signal indicator

LED (green) turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal at

digital domain

AD converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times over-

sampling (fs=88.2, 96 kHz)

Input selector

CH15/16/2TR IN for CH15/16

Digital Input

(2TR IN DIGITAL, ADAT input)

Option Input (SLOT) Available cards

Optional digital interface cards (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)

Input Channel CH1–32

Input patch

—

Phase

Normal/reverse

Gate-type

On/off

Key in: 12 ch Group (1–12, 13–24, 25–32)/AUX1–8

Comp-type

On/off

Key in: self /Stereo Link

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

4-band PEQ (TYPE1)

On/off

Delay

0–43400 samples

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized (INPUT/AUX1–8)

Aux send

On/off

AUX1–8; pre fader/post fader

Solo

On/off

Pre fader/after pan

Pan

127 positions (Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63)

Surround pan

127  127 positions

([Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63] x [Front= 1–63, Center, Rear= 1–63])

LFE level

–, –96 dB to +10 dB (256 step)

Routing

STEREO, BUS1–8, DIRECT OUT

Direct out

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

Stereo Input Channel CH1–4

Input patch (L/R)

—

Phase (L/R)

Normal/reverse

Attenuator (L/R)

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Equalizer

4band PEQ (TYPE1)

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized

INPUT/AUX1–8 send

Aux send

On/off

AUX1–8; pre fader/post fader

Solo

On/off

Pre fader/after pan

Pan (L/R)

127 positions (Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63)

Surround pan

(L/R)

127  127 positions

([Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63] x [Front= 1–63, Center, Rear= 1–63])

LFE level (L/R)

–, –96 dB to +10 dB (256 step)

Routing

STEREO, BUS1–8, DIRECT OUT

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

General Spec 57

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Specifications

OSCILLATOR

Level

0 to –96 dB (1 dB step)

On/off

—

Waveform

Sine 100 Hz, sine 1 kHz, sine 10 kHz, pink noise, burst noise

Routing

BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO L/R

STEREO OUT DA converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times over-

sampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz)

MONITOR OUT DA converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times over-

sampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz)

OMNI OUT 1–4

Output patch

STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, DIRECT OUT 1–32, INSERT OUT (CH1–32,

BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO), CASCADE OUT (BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO,

SOLO)

DA converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times over-

sampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz)

2TR OUT DIGITAL

Dither

On/off

Word length 16, 20, 24-bit

Output patch

STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, DIRECT OUT 1–32, INSERT OUT (CH 1–32,

BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO), CASCADE OUT (BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO,

SOLO)

ADAT Output

Dither

On/off

Word length 16, 20, 24-bit

Output patch

STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, DIRECT OUT 1–32, INSERT OUT (CH 1–32,

BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO), CASCADE OUT (BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO,

SOLO)

Option Output (SLOT)

Available card

Optional digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)

Dither

On/off

Word length 16/20/24-bit

Output patch

STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, DIRECT OUT 1–32, INSERT OUT (CH 1–32,

BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO), CASCADE OUT (BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO,

SOLO)

STEREO

Comp-type

On/off

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

4-band PEQ

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized

Balance

127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)

Delay

0–29100 samples

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

12-elements x2 LED meters

BUS1–8

Comp-type

On/off

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

4-band PEQ

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized

Delay

0–29100 samples

Bus to stereo

Level (–, –138 dB–0 dB)

On/off

Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

58 Specifications

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

AUX1–8

Comp-type

On/off

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

4-band PEQ

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized

Delay

0–29100 samples

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

INTERNAL EFFECTS

(EFFECT 1–4)

Number of

effects

[email protected], 48kHz

[email protected], 96kHz

Bypass

On/off

In/out

2-in, 2-out

Effect-in from

AUX1–8/INSERT OUT

Effect-out to

Input patch

Power Requirements

U.S./Canada

120 V, 60 Hz 90 W

Other

220–240 V, 50/60 Hz 90 W

Dimensions (H x D x W)

148 x 548 x 436 mm

Weight (without the included items)

14 kg

Operating free-air temperature range

0–35°C

Storage temperature range

–20 to 60°C

Supplied Accessories

AC Cable

CUBASE AI DOWNLOAD INFORMATION (printed)

Owner’s Manual

Options

Digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series)

RACK MOUNT KIT: RK1

1. Total harmonic distortion is measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 80 kHz.

2. Hum & Noise are measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB/octave

attenuation.

3. See “Gate Parameters” on page 59.

4. See “Comp Parameters” on page 60.

5. See “EQ Parameters” on page 59.

General Spec 59

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Specifications

EQ Parameters

Gate Parameters

LOW/HPF L-MID H-MID HIGH /LPF

0.1–10.0

(41 points)

low shelving

HPF

0.1–10.0

(41 points)

0.1–10.0

(41 points)

high shelving

LPF

21.2 Hz–20.0 kHz (1/12 oct step)

±18 dB

(0.1 dB step)

HPF: on/off

±18 dB

(0.1 dB step)

±18 dB

(0.1 dB step)

LPF: on/off

Gate

Threshold

–54dB–0dB (0.1dB step)

Range

–70dB–0dB (1dB step)

Attack

0ms–120ms (1ms step)

Hold

0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz

0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz

0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz

0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Decay

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Ducking

Threshold

–54 dB–0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Range

–70 dB–0 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Hold

0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz

0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz

0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz

0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Decay

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

60 Specifications

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Comp Parameters

Libraries

Compressor

Threshold

–54 dB–0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20,  (16 points)

Out gain

0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step)

Knee

Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Release

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Expander

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20,  (16 points)

Out gain

0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step)

Knee

Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 points)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Release

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Compander H

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points)

Out gain

–18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Width

1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Release

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Compander S

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points)

Out gain

–18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Width

1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Release

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Effect library

Presets 56

User memories 72

Compressor library

Presets 36

User memories 92

Gate library

Presets 4

User memories 124

EQ library

Presets 40

User memories 160

Channel library

Presets 2

User memories 127

Input patch library

Presets 1

User memories 32

Output patch library

Presets 1

User memories 32

Analog Input Spec 61

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Specifications

Analog Input Spec

In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms.

For 2TR IN levels, 0 dBV is referenced to 1.00 Vrms.

All input AD converters (CH INPUT 1–16) are 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling. (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz)

+48 V DC (phantom power) is supplied to CH INPUT (1–12) XLR type connectors.

Three PHANTOM +48V switches CH1–4, 5–8, 9–12 turn on the phantom power for inputs 1–4, 5–8, 9–12 respectively.

Analog Output Specs

In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms.

2TR OUT [L, R] levels, 0 dBV is referenced to 1.00 Vrms.

All output DA converters are 24-bit, 128-times oversampling. (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz)

Input PAD GAIN

Actual Load

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

Input level

Connector

Sensitivity

1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dB (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit

is set to maximum gain. (All faders and level controls are maximum position.)

Nominal

Max.

before clip

INPUT A/B

1–12

–60 dB

3 kΩ

50–600 Ω

Mics & 600 Ω

Lines

–70 dBu

(0.245 mV)

–60 dBu

(0.775 mV)

–40 dBu

(7.75 mV)

A: XLR-3-31 type

(Balanced)

B: Phone jack

(TRS) (Balanced)

2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

3. Phone jacks are balanced (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND).

–16 dB

–26 dBu

(38.8 mV)

–16 dBu

(123 mV)

+4 dBu

(1.23 V)

–6 dBu

(388 mV)

+4 dBu

(1.23 V)

+24 dBu

(12.28 V)

INPUT 13–16

—

–26 dB

10 kΩ 600 Ω Lines

–36 dBu

(12.3 mV)

–26 dBu

(38.8 mV)

–6 dBu

(388 mV)

Phone jack (TRS)

(Balanced)

+4 dB

–6 dBu

(388 mV)

+4 dBu

(1.23 V)

+24 dBu

(12.28 V)

CH INSERT IN

1–12

—10 kΩ 600 Ω Lines

–12 dBu

(195 mV)

–2 dBu

(616 mV)

+18 dBu

(6.16 V)

Phone jack (TRS)

(Unbalanced)

4. CH INSERT IN/OUT phone jacks are unbalanced. (Tip=OUTPUT, Ring=INPUT, Sleeve=GND).

2TR IN [L, R]

—10 kΩ 600 Ω Lines

–10 dBV

(316 mV)

–10 dBV

(316 mV)

+10 dBV

(3.16 V)

RCA pin jack

(Unbalanced)

Output

Actual Source

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

Output level

Connector

Nominal

Max.

before clip

STEREO OUT [L, R]

75 Ω 600 Ω Lines

+4 dBu

(1.23 V)

+24 dBu

(12.28 V)

XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)

1. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

OMNI OUT 1–4

150 Ω 10 kΩ Lines

+4 dBu

(1.23 V)

+24 dBu

(12.28 V)

Phone jack (TRS) (Balanced)

2. Phone jacks are balanced (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND).

MONITOR OUT [L, R]

150 Ω 10 kΩ Lines

+4 dBu

(1.23 V)

+24 dBu

(12.28 V)

Phone jack (TRS) (Balanced)

CH INSERT OUT 1–12

600 Ω 10 kΩ Lines

–2 dBu

(616 mV)

+18 dBu

(6.16 V)

Phone jack (TRS) (Unbalanced)

3. CH INSERT IN/OUT phone jacks are unbalanced. (Tip=OUTPUT, Ring=INPUT, Sleeve=GND).

2TR OUT [L, R]

600 Ω 10 kΩ Lines

–10 dBV

(316 mV)

+10 dBV

(3.16 V)

RCA Pin Jack (Unbalanced)

PHONES

100 Ω

8 Ω Phones 4 mW 25 mW

Stereo Phone Jack (TRS) (Unbalanced)

4. PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND).

40 Ω Phones 12 mW 75 mW

62 Specifications

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Digital Input Spec

Digital Output Spec

Input Format Data length Level Connector

2TR IN DIGITAL IEC 60958 24-bit 0.5 Vpp/75 Ω RCA pin jack

ADAT IN

ADAT

1. ALESIS proprietary multichannel optical digital interface format

24-bit — OPTICAL

Output Format Data length Level Connector

2TR OUT DIGITAL

IEC 60958

Consumer use

1. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL

Type: linear PCM

Category code: Digital signal mixer

Copy prohibit: NO

Emphasis: NO

Clock accuracy: Level II (1000 ppm)

Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration

24-bit

0.5V pp/75 Ω RCA pin jack

ADAT OUT

ADAT

2. ALESIS proprietary multichannel optical digital interface format

24-bit

3. Dither: word length 16/20/24 bit

—OPTICAL

I/O SLOT Spec 63

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Specifications

I/O SLOT Spec

The I/O SLOT accepts a mini YGDAI card. The SLOT has a serial interface.

Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio website for the latest information on mini-YGDAI cards.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

64 Specifications

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

MIDI/USB/WORD CLOCK I/O Spec

Dimensions

Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only.

Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time with-

out prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale,

please check with your Yamaha dealer.

European Models

Inrush Current based on EN 55103-1:2009

5A (on initial switch-on)

5A (after a supply interruption of 5s)

Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4

I/O Port Format Level Connector in Console

TO HOST USB USB 2.0 —

B type USB connector

Audio: 16 in/16 out

MIDI: 5 ports

MIDI

1. MIDI IN can use as TIME CODE IN MTC.

MIDI — DIN Connector 5P

OUT

MIDI — DIN Connector 5P

THRU

MIDI — DIN Connector 5P

WORD CLOCK

—TTL/75 Ω BNC Connector

OUT

—TTL/75 Ω BNC Connector

430 (Not included Screw Heads)

436 (Included Screw Heads)

148

540

350101

548

350

Unit: mm

Options 65

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Options

Rack Mounting the 01V96i Using RK1 Rack Mount Kit

You can rack mount the 01V96i using an optional RK1 Rack Mount Kit.

1. Hold one of the brackets against one side of the 01V96i so that the bracket ear projects

to the side, and align three holes on the bracket with the holes on the side of the 01V96i,

as shown in the illustration below.

2. Affix the bracket using three screws included in the RK1 package.

3. Attach the other bracket to the other side of the 01V96i in the same way.

66 Index

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Index

Symbols

/INSERT/DELAY button .............. 12

Numerics

01V96i Editor ...........................................7

1–16/17–32 buttons .............................. 13

1–8 ........................................................... 46

1–8 buttons

............................................ 14

1–8 buttons (Routing) ......................... 34

2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL ............ 17

2TR IN/OUT connectors

.................... 11

2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL ........ 17

AD Output Section ............................... 16

AD15/16 selector .................................. 10

ADAT IN/OUT connectors

................ 17

ASSIGN section .................................... 45

ATT. ........................................................ 36

Attaching a cover

.....................................9

AUX 1–AUX 8 buttons ....................... 12

Aux Send ................................................ 12

BANK ...............................................44, 46

Buttons

................................................... 20

CH1-32 page .......................................... 23

CH1–4 ON/OFF switch ....................... 16

CH5–8 ON/OFF switch ....................... 16

CH9–12 ON/OFF switch

.................... 16

Channel faders ...................................... 11

Channel Strip Section .......................... 11

Channels

................................................. 22

CLEAR button ....................................... 15

COMP (Compressor) .......................... 37

Comp Edit page

.................................... 37

COMP GR .............................................. 24

Comp Lib page ...................................... 37

COMP. (H) (Compander Hard)

........ 37

COMP. (S) (Compander Soft) ........... 37

Compressing .......................................... 37

Confirmation Messages

....................... 21

Connections and Setup ........................ 25

Consumer format (IEC 60958) .......... 17

Contrast control

.................................... 13

Cursor buttons ...................................... 15

D button (Routing) .............................. 34

Daisy Chain Distribution

.................... 27

Data Entry Section ................................ 15

DEC/INC buttons ................................. 15

DEL button

............................................ 21

Digital I/O Section ................................ 17

DIO/SETUP button ............................. 12

Direct Outs

............................................ 33

Display ............................................. 13, 19

DISPLAY ACCESS Section .................12

Display Interface

...................................20

Display Pages .........................................20

Driver ........................................................ 7

DYNAMICS button

.............................12

EDIT indicator ......................................19

EFFECT button .....................................13

Effect page

..............................................24

Effects ......................................................38

Effects library .........................................38

ENTER button

.......................................15

Enter titles ..............................................21

EQ ............................................................35

EQ button

...............................................13

EQ Library ..............................................36

EXPAND (Expander) ...........................37

F (Frequency) .........................................36

F1–F4 buttons

........................................13

Factory default password .....................47

Factory-preset ........................................48

FADER MODE Section

.......................12

Fader Modes ..........................................22

Faders ......................................................20

Firmware updates

...................................8

FREQUENCY control ..........................14

G (Gain) ..................................................36

GAIN control .................................. 10, 14

GATE GR

...............................................24

H. SHELF (high-shelving) ...................36

HIGH button .........................................14

HIGH-MID button ...............................14

HOME button

.......................................12

HPF (high-pass filter) ...........................36

In Name page .........................................43

INITIALIZE button ....................... 43, 46

Initializing

..............................................48

INPUT connectors 13–16 ....................10

INPUT connectors A/B .......................10

Input Patching

.......................................31

INPUT section .......................................23

INS button

..............................................21

INSERT I/O connectors .......................10

L. SHELF (low-shelving) ......................36

LAYER Section ......................................13

Layers

......................................................21

LEVEL .....................................................24

Level controls .........................................12

LEVEL section

.......................................45

Lock page ................................................47

Long name ..............................................43

LOW button ...........................................14

LOW-MID button

.................................14

MASTER button ....................................13

Master page .............................................23

Metering

..................................................23

MIDI button ...........................................12

MIDI IN/THRU/OUT ports ...............17

MIDI indicator

.......................................19

MIDI/USB Section ................................17

mini-YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital

Audio Interface) I/O cards

....18

Mixing system ........................................25

MONITOR LEVEL control .................11

Monitor Levels

.......................................41

Monitor Out & Headphones Section

..11

MONITOR OUT connectors L/R ......16

Monitor Source selector

.......................11

Name Input Auto Copy check box ....43

OMNI OUT connectors 1–4 ...............16

ON buttons ......................................11, 12

Operating Basics ....................................19

OPERATION LOCK

............................47

Operation Lock ......................................47

OPERATION LOCK SAFE section ...47

Optional Card

........................................18

Oscillator .................................................45

Oscillator page .......................................45

Output Patching

....................................31

OUTPUT section ...................................23

PAD switches .........................................10

PAIR/GROUP button ...........................12

Pairing

.....................................................33

PAN control ...........................................14

PAN/ROUTING button

......................12

Parameter Boxes

....................................20

Parameter wheel ....................................15

PASSWORD ...........................................48

Password window

..................................47

PATCH button ......................................12

Patching

Input Channels

...............................29

Output Channels ............................29

PEAK HOLD button

............................24

Peak Hold function ...............................24

PEAK indicators ....................................10

PHANTOM +48V

.................................16

PHONES jack .........................................11

PHONES LEVEL control .....................11

Position page

..........................................23

POST FADER ........................................23

POWER ON/OFF switch .....................18

PRE EQ

....................................................23

PRE FADER ...........................................23

Index 67

01V96i—Owner’s Manual

Index

Q (slope) .................................................35

Q control

.................................................14

RECALL button .....................................14

Recording system ..................................26

Recording to DAW Software

..............39

REMOTE button ...................................13

Rotary controls ......................................20

Routing

...................................................33

S button (Routing) ................................34

Sampling rate indicator ........................19

SCENE button .......................................12

Scene Memories

.....................................42

SCENE MEMORY Section ..................14

Scene Up / Down buttons .........14

SEL buttons

..................................... 11, 12

SELECTED CHANNEL Section ........14

Selecting

Channels

..........................................22

Display Pages ..................................20

Fader Modes ...................................22

Layers

...............................................21

Setting the Input Levels ........................32

SHIFT LOCK button ............................21

Short name

.............................................43

Shortcut ...................................................46

SIGNAL indicators ...............................10

SLOT Section

.........................................18

SOLO buttons ................................. 11, 12

SOLO indicator .....................................15

SOLO Section

.........................................15

SPC button .............................................21

ST IN button ..........................................12

ST IN page

..............................................23

ST IN Section .........................................12

Star Distribution ....................................27

STEREO fader

........................................11

Stereo meters ..........................................13

Stereo Out

...............................................17

STEREO OUT connectors L/R

...........17

Stereo page ..............................................24

STEREO Section ....................................11

STORE button

.......................................14

Studio Manager .......................................7

Surround mode indicator ....................19

Synchronization status

.........................28

Synchronize ............................................27

Tab Scroll ................................................13

TITLE

......................................................46

Title Edit Window ................................21

TO HOST USB port .............................17

USB 2.0 port ...........................................17

USB OUT

................................................30

User Assignable Layer ...........................44

User Define Select window ..................46

User Defined Keys

.................................46

USER DEFINED KEYS Section ..........14

UTILITY button

....................................12

Utility software .........................................7

VIEW button ..........................................13

WAVEFORM .........................................45

WORD CLOCK IN connector ............17

WORD CLOCK OUT connector

.......17

Wordclock ..............................................27

Wordclock master .................................27

Wordclock slave

.....................................27

Wordclock Source .................................28

Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver ..............7

01V96i Block Diagram

01V96i Level Diagram

DSP Noise Floor

PHASE GATEAD

dBu

Analog

CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT

Digital Clipping Level

Max.

Output

Nominal Output

[+18dBu]

[+24dBu]

[+4dBu]

Digital

Bit

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-130

-140

-150

-160

-170

-190

-200

-210

GAIN

dBu

Analog

dBFS

-180

[0dBu = 0.775Vrms]

[0dBFS = Full Scale]

+20

+10

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-130

-140

-150

-160

+24

-170

-180

-190

Input

Max.

[+24dBu]

[+4dBu]

[-60dBu]

[-40dBu]

Nominal

Input

Nominal

Input

PAD

INSERT

DigitalAnalog

GAIN MAX.,

PAD OFF

GAIN MIN.,

PAD ON

Input

Max.

Digital Analog

ATT. EQINSERT

LEVELON

NAPYALEDPMOC

DELAY

BUS

Adder

ATT. EQ

COMP

MASTER

LEVEL

MASTER

INSERT INSERT

INSERT INSERT INSERT

BAL

OUTPUT

PATCH

INPUT

PATCH

+20

+10

-10

-20

-30

-40

-50

-60

-70

-80

-90

-100

-110

-120

-130

-140

-150

-160

+24

-170

-180

-190

STEREO OUT

MONITOR OUT

OMNI OUT

-2

[-2dBu]

ADDRESS LIST

HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Commercial Audio Business Division

10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650

CANADA

Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.

135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario,

M1S 3R1, Canada

Tel: +1-416-298-1311

U.S.A.

Yamaha Corporation of America

6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620,

U.S.A.

Tel: +1-714-522-9011

MEXICO

Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V.

Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José

Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México,

D.F., C.P. 03900, México

Tel: +52-55-5804-0600

BRAZIL

Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda.

Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B – Vila

Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP, Brazil

Tel: +55-11-3704-1377

ARGENTINA

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.,

Sucursal Argentina

Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte,

Madero Este-C1107CEK,

Buenos Aires, Argentina

Tel: +54-11-4119-7000

PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN

AMERICAN COUNTRIES/

CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A.

Edif. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización

Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia,

Ciudad de Panamá, República de Panamá

Tel: +507-269-5311

THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK)

Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,

MK7 8BL, U.K.

Tel: +44-1908-366700

GERMANY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-303-0

SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch

Switzerland in Thalwil

Seestrasse 18a, 8800 Thalwil, Switzerland

Tel: +41-44-3878080

AUSTRIA/BULGARIA/

CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/

ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Branch Austria

Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria

Tel: +43-1-60203900

POLAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Sp.z o.o. Oddział w Polsce

ul. Wielicka 52, 02-657 Warszawa, Poland

Tel: +48-22-880-08-88

MALTA

Olimpus Music Ltd.

Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta

Tel: +356-2133-2093

NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/

LUXEMBOURG

Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux

Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands

Tel: +31-347-358040

FRANCE

Ya m a h a M u si c E u ro p e

7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest,

77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France

Tel: +33-1-6461-4000

ITALY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy

Via Tinelli N.67/69 20855 Gerno di Lesmo (MB),

Italy

Tel: +39-039-9065-1

SPAIN/PORTUGAL

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal

en España

Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231

Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain

Tel: +34-91-639-88-88

GREECE

Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House

19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki,

Greece

Tel: +30-210-6686168

SWEDEN/FINLAND/ICELAND

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial

Scandinavia

JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden

Tel: +46-31-89-34-00

DENMARK

Yamaha Music Denmark,

Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland

Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH. , 2860 Søborg, Denmark

Tel: +45-44-92-49-00

NORWAY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany -

Norwegian Branch

Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway

Tel: +47-6716-7800

RUSSIA

Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC.

Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street,

Moscow, 121059, Russia

Tel: +7-495-626-5005

OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-3030

Ya m a h a M u si c G u l f F Z E

JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,

Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE

Tel: +971-4-801-1500

TURKEY

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi

Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz

Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey

Tel: +90-212-999-8010

CYPRUS

Yamaha Music Europe GmbH

Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany

Tel: +49-4101-303-0

OTHER COUNTRIES

Ya m a h a M u si c G u l f F Z E

JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328,

Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE

Tel: +971-4-801-1500

THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA

Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd.

2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu,

Shanghai, China

Tel: +86-400-051-7700

INDIA

Yamaha Music India Private Limited

P-401, JMD Megapolis, Sector-48, Sohna Road,

Gurgaon-122018, Haryana, India

Tel: +91-124-485-3300

INDONESIA

PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor)

Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot

Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia

Tel: +62-21-520-2577

KOREA

Yamaha Music Korea Ltd.

8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil,

Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 06169, Korea

Tel: +82-2-3467-3300

MALAYSIA

Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd.

No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301

Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia

Tel: +60-3-78030900

SINGAPORE

Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited

Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00,

Singapore 530202, Singapore

Tel: +65-6740-9200

TAIWAN

Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co.,Ltd.

2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd., Banqiao Dist.,

New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan (R.O.C.)

Tel: +886-2-7741-8888

THAILAND

Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.

3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building,

891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai,

Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand

Tel: +66-2215-2622

VIETNAM

Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited

15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach

Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3,

Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam

Tel: +84-8-3818-1122

OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES

Yam a h a Co rp or at io n

Sales & Marketing Division

10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

AUSTRALIA

Yam a h a M u si c A u s t ra li a P ty. Lt d .

Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank,

VIC 3006, Australia

Tel: +61-3-9693-5111

COUNTRIES AND TRUST

TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN

Yam a h a Co rp or at io n

Sales & Marketing Division

10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu,

Japan 430-8650

Tel: +81-53-460-2312

NORTH AMERICA

CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA

EUROPE

AFRICA

MIDDLE EAST

ASIA

OCEANIA

PA48

Published 05/2017 IPTO-C0

Manual Development Group

Printed in Japan

WZ74200

Yamaha Downloads

http://download.yamaha.com/

Yamaha Pro Audio global website

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

Transcripción de documentos

Owner’s Manual Keep This Manual For Future Reference. EN 2 Contents Contents PRECAUTIONS ...................................5 Using the Oscillator .................................. Using the User Defined Keys ................... Using Operation Lock ............................... Initializing .................................................. Welcome .......................................... 7 Troubleshooting ............................ 49 Package Contents ......................................... About the utility software ........................... Firmware updates ........................................ About this Owner’s Manual ....................... Conventions Used in this Manual ............. 7 7 8 8 8 Control Surface & Rear Panel .......... 9 Control Surface ............................................ 9 Rear Panel ................................................... 16 Installing an Optional Card ..................... 18 Operating Basics ............................ 19 About the Display ...................................... 19 Selecting Display Pages ............................. 20 Display Interface ........................................ 20 Selecting Layers .......................................... 21 Selecting Channels ..................................... 22 Selecting Fader Modes .............................. 22 Metering ...................................................... 23 Connections and Setup ................. 25 45 46 47 48 Error messages .............................. 51 Contents of the Reference Manual ........................................... 54 Specifications ................................. 55 General Spec ............................................... Libraries ...................................................... Analog Input Spec ..................................... Analog Output Specs ................................ Digital Input Spec ...................................... Digital Output Spec ................................... I/O SLOT Spec ........................................... MIDI/USB/WORD CLOCK I/O Spec .... Dimensions ................................................ 55 60 61 61 62 62 63 64 64 Options .......................................... 65 Rack Mounting the 01V96i Using RK1 Rack Mount Kit ...................................... 65 Connections ................................................ 25 Wordclock Connections and Settings .... 27 Input and Output Patching ...................... 29 Index .............................................. 66 Tutorial .......................................... 31 01V96i Level Diagram .......End of Manual Input and Output Patching ...................... 31 Setting the Input Levels ............................ 32 Pairing Channels ........................................ 33 Setting the Routing .................................... 33 EQ’ing the Input Signals ........................... 35 Using the EQ Library ................................ 36 Compressing the Input Signals ................ 37 Using the Internal Effects ......................... 38 Recording to DAW Software via the USB Port ........................................... 39 Adjusting the Monitor Levels from the DAW .................................................. 41 Using Scene Memories .............................. 42 Changing the Channel Names ................. 43 Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User Assignable Layer) ....... 44 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 01V96i Block Diagram.......End of Manual • Explanation of Graphical Symbols CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the product. The above warning is located on the rear of the unit. IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read these instructions. Keep these instructions. Heed all warnings. Follow all instructions. Do not use this apparatus near water. Clean only with dry cloth. Do not block any ventilation openings. Install in accordance with the manufacturer’s instructions. Do not install near any heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other apparatus (including amplifiers) that produce heat. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized or grounding-type plug. A polarized plug has two blades with one wider than the other. A grounding type plug has two blades and a third grounding prong. The wide blade or the third prong are provided for your safety. If the provided plug does not fit into your outlet, consult an electrician for replacement of the obsolete outlet. WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPARATUS TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. 10 Protect the power cord from being walked on or pinched particularly at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the apparatus. 11 Only use attachments/accessories specified by the manufacturer. 12 Use only with the cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table specified by the manufacturer, or sold with the apparatus. When a cart is used, use caution when moving the cart/ apparatus combination to avoid injury from tip-over. 13 Unplug this apparatus during lightning storms or when unused for long periods of time. 14 Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Servicing is required when the apparatus has been damaged in any way, such as powersupply cord or plug is damaged, liquid has been spilled or objects have fallen into the apparatus, the apparatus has been exposed to rain or moisture, does not operate normally, or has been dropped. FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/ or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. VAROITUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. (lithium caution) NEDERLAND / THE NETHERLANDS • Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up. (class B) COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party : Yamaha Corporation of America Address : 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620 Telephone : 714-522-9011 Type of Equipment : Digital Mixing Console Model Name : 01V96i This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: 1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and 2) this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See user manual instructions if interference to radio reception is suspected. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. • This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up. (FCC DoC) • Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur of gelieve dan contact op te nemen met de vertegenwoordiging van Yamaha in uw land. • For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of life please consult your retailer or Yamaha representative office in your country. • Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA. • Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical waste. (lithium disposal) This product contains a battery that contains perchlorate material. Perchlorate Material—special handling may apply, See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (Perchlorate) This product contains a high intensity lamp that contains a small amount of mercury. Disposal of this material may be regulated due to environmental considerations. For disposal information in the United States, refer to the Electronic Industries Alliance web site: www.eiae.org * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA. (mercury) IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM Connecting the Plug and Cord WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code: GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN-and-YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or colored GREEN or GREEN-and-YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. (3 wires) PRECAUTIONS PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE PROCEEDING * Please keep this manual in a safe place for future reference. WARNING Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of serious injury or even death from electrical shock, short-circuiting, damages, fire or other hazards. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord Water warning • Do not place the power cord near heat sources such as heaters or radiators, and do not excessively bend or otherwise damage the cord, place heavy objects on it, or place it in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over it. • Only use the voltage specified as correct for the device. The required voltage is printed on the name plate of the device. • Use only the supplied power cord/plug. If you intend to use the device in an area other than in the one you purchased, the included power cord may not be compatible. Please check with your Yamaha dealer. • Check the electric plug periodically and remove any dirt or dust which may have accumulated on it. • Be sure to connect to an appropriate outlet with a protective grounding connection. Improper grounding can result in electrical shock. • Do not expose the device to rain, use it near water or in damp or wet conditions, or place on it any containers (such as vases, bottles or glasses) containing liquids which might spill into any openings. If any liquid such as water seeps into the device, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Never insert or remove an electric plug with wet hands. Fire warning • Do not put burning items, such as candles, on the unit. A burning item may fall over and cause a fire. If you notice any abnormality Do not open • This device contains no user-serviceable parts. Do not open the device or attempt to disassemble the internal parts or modify them in any way. If it should appear to be malfunctioning, discontinue use immediately and have it inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • When one of the following problems occur, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the electric plug from the outlet. Then have the device inspected by Yamaha service personnel. - The power cord or plug becomes frayed or damaged. - It emits unusual smells or smoke. - Some object has been dropped into the device. - There is a sudden loss of sound during use of the device. • If this device should be dropped or damaged, immediately turn off the power switch, disconnect the electric plug from the outlet, and have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. CAUTION Always follow the basic precautions listed below to avoid the possibility of physical injury to you or others, or damage to the device or other property. These precautions include, but are not limited to, the following: Power supply/Power cord • When removing the electric plug from the device or an outlet, always hold the plug itself and not the cord. Pulling by the cord can damage it. • Remove the electric plug from the outlet when the device is not to be used for extended periods of time, or during electrical storms. • Do not hold the bottom of the device when transporting or moving it. In doing so, you may pinch your hands under the device, and result in injury. • Do not press the rear panel of the device against the wall. Doing so may cause the plug to come in contact with the wall and detach from the power cord, resulting in short circuiting, malfunction, or even fire. • Do not place the device in a location where it may come into contact with corrosive gases or salt air. Doing so may result in malfunction. Location • Do not place the device in an unstable position where it might accidentally fall over. • Do not block the vents. This device has ventilation holes at the rear and sides to prevent the internal temperature from becoming too high. In particular, do not place the device on its side or upside down. Inadequate ventilation can result in overheating, possibly causing damage to the device(s), or even fire. • Before moving the device, remove all connected cables. • When setting up the device, make sure that the AC outlet you are using is easily accessible. If some trouble or malfunction occurs, immediately turn off the power switch and disconnect the plug from the outlet. Even when the power switch is turned off, electricity is still flowing to the product at the minimum level. When you are not using the product for a long time, make sure to unplug the power cord from the wall AC outlet. • If mounting this device in an EIA-standard rack, leave the back of the rack open, and keep the rack least 10 cm from the wall. If you mount this device in a rack together with a device that tends to generate heat, such as a power amp, take precautions to prevent heat from building up inside this device, for example by leaving space between the devices and by installing ventilation panels. PA_en_1 1/2 Connections Handling caution • Before connecting the device to other devices, turn off the power for all devices. Before turning the power on or off for all devices, set all volume levels to minimum. Maintenance • Remove the power plug from the AC outlet when cleaning the device. • Do not insert your fingers or hands in any gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.). • Avoid inserting or dropping foreign objects (paper, plastic, metal, etc.) into any gaps or openings on the device (vents, etc.) If this happens, turn off the power immediately and unplug the power cord from the AC outlet. Then have the device inspected by qualified Yamaha service personnel. • Do not rest your weight on the device or place heavy objects on it, and avoid use excessive force on the buttons, switches or connectors. • Do not use the headphones for a long period of time at a high or uncomfortable volume level, since this can cause permanent hearing loss. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, consult a physician. Notice Information Please observe the following precautions to prevent this device from malfunction or damage, and to avoid loss of data. Precautions for care and handling • Do not use this device near another electrical product such as a television, radio, stereo, or portable phone. Doing so may cause noise to be heard from this device or from the television or radio. • Do not use this device in locations exposed to direct sunlight (such as the interior of a vehicle during the daytime), in locations of extremely high temperature such as near a stove, in locations of extremely low temperature, or in locations of excessive dust or heavy vibration. Doing so may cause the panel of this device to deform, cause malfunctions in the internal components, or cause operation to become unstable. • Do not place vinyl, plastic, or rubber items on this device. Doing so may cause the panel to be discolored or disfigured. * The illustrations and screen displays as shown in this Owner’s Manual are for instructional purposes only, and may be different from the ones on your device. * The company names and product names in this Owner’s Manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage caused by improper use or modifications to the device, or data that is lost or destroyed. Always turn the power off when the device is not in use. The performance of components with moving contacts, such as switches, volume controls, and connectors, deteriorates over time. Consult qualified Yamaha service personnel about replacing defective components. Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old Equipment This symbol on the products, packaging, and/or accompanying documents means that used electrical and electronic products should not be mixed with general household waste. Backup battery • This device has a built-in backup battery. When you unplug the power cord from the AC outlet, the internal data is retained. However, if the backup battery fully discharges, this data will be lost. If the backup battery is running low, when you turn on the device the display indicates “WARNING Low Battery!.” In this case, immediately save the data to an external media using MIDI Bulk Dump, then have qualified Yamaha service personnel replace the backup battery. The average life of the internal backup battery is approximately 5 years, depending on operating conditions. For proper treatment, recovery and recycling of old products, please take them to applicable collection points, in accordance with your national legislation and the Directives 2002/96/EC. By disposing of these products correctly, you will help to save valuable resources and prevent any potential negative effects on human health and the environment which could otherwise arise from inappropriate waste handling. For more information about collection and recycling of old products, please contact your local municipality, your waste disposal service or the point of sale where you purchased the items. [For business users in the European Union] If you wish to discard electrical and electronic equipment, please contact your dealer or supplier for further information. [Information on Disposal in other Countries outside the European Union] This symbol is only valid in the European Union. If you wish to discard these items, please contact your local authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal. (weee_eu) PA_en_1 2/2 Welcome Welcome About the utility software The provided utility software allows you to use the 01V96i connected with your computer. ■ Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver This is driver software for connecting the 01V96i to your computer. Installing it in your computer will allow audio/MIDI communication to occur. ■ 01V96i Editor Package Contents • Power cord • Owner’s manual (this document) • CUBASE AI DOWNLOAD INFORMATION (printed) This is software that allows you to make settings for the 01V96i console from your computer. It also allows you to back up the settings of the console, and to create setups even when the physical console is not available. 01V96i Editor runs within the platform software “Studio Manager Version 2.” ■ Studio Manager Version 2 This is software that centrally manages multiple editors. 01V96i Editor also runs within this software. It allows you to save or recall settings for multiple devices simultaneously. These software can be downloaded from the Yamaha Pro Audio website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ For details on installation and setup, refer to the above website and to the installation guide that was included with the program you downloaded. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Welcome Thank you for choosing the Yamaha 01V96i Digital Mixing Console. The compact 01V96i Digital Console features 24-bit/96 kHz digital audio processing without compromise, as well as 40-channel simultaneous mixing. The 01V96i covers a broad range of needs and applications including multi-track recording, 2-channel mixdown, and surround sound production. 7 8 Welcome Firmware updates This product is designed to allow the internal firmware to be updated in order to improve performance, add functionality, or fix problems. Firmware updates are performed with the product connected to a computer, so you must first install the “Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver” in your computer. Firmware updating is performed using update software. You can download the update software from the following website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ For details on the update procedure and settings, refer to the firmware update guide provided on the website. About this Owner’s Manual ■ Owner’s manual (this document) The owner’s manual describes the names and functions of items on the panels, and explains basic operation. ■ Reference manual (PDF format) This explains details of the functionality, the effect parameters, and MIDI-related functions. The Reference Manual is available on the Yamaha Pro Audio website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Using the PDF manual The reference manual is provided as a PDF-format electronic file that you can view on your computer. By using “Adobe®Reader®” to view this file on your computer, you’ll be able to rapidly search for terms, print only the pages you require, or click a link to access a relevant section. In particular, searching for terms and clicking links are conveniences available only in an electronic file, and we hope you take advantage of these possibilities. The latest version of Adobe Reader can be downloaded from the following website. http://www.adobe.com/ 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Conventions Used in this Manual The 01V96i features two types of buttons: physical buttons that you can press (e.g., ENTER and DISPLAY) and buttons that appear on the display pages. References to physical buttons are enclosed in square brackets, for example, “press the [ENTER] button.” References to display page buttons are not emphasized, for example, “move the cursor to the ON button.” You can select display pages by using the [DISPLAY] buttons or the Left Tab Scroll, Right Tab Scroll, and F1–4 buttons below the display. In order to simplify explanations, the procedures reference only the [DISPLAY] button method. See “Selecting Display Pages” on page 20 for details on all the ways in which you can select pages. Control Surface & Rear Panel 9 Control Surface & Rear Panel Control Surface AD Input Section (p. 10) CH1-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 CH5-8 12 13 15 14 16 CH9-12 PHANTOM +48V L A A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B A B R B IN INPUT OUT 2TR (BAL) -10dBV (UNBAL) PHONES INSERT OUT IN (UNBAL) INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB CH15/16 2TR IN MONITOR 2TR IN PAD +4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 0 LEVEL 10 MONITOR OUT -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL DISPLAY ACCESS FADER MODE Section (p. 12) DIO/SETUP SCENE +4 GAIN -26 -60 -16 GAIN 13 0 LEVEL +4 GAIN -26 PEAK 14 15 SIGNAL PEAK 16 SIGNAL SCENE MEMORY MIDI UTILITY STORE RECALL SOLO SOLO Section (p. 15) CLEAR OVER PAN/ / INSERT/ ROUTING DELAY 10 PHONES Monitor Out & Headphones Section (p. 11) PAIR/ GROUP PATCH EFFECT VIEW 0 -3 -6 EQ DYNAMICS Display Section (p. 13) FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 DEC INC -9 -12 -15 -18 Data Entry Section (p. 15) -24 -30 -36 HIGH Q -48 STEREO AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 HIGH-MID FREQUENCY SELECTED CHANNEL Section (p. 14) HOME (METER) LOW-MID LAYER LAYER Section (p. 13) ENTER 1-16 17-32 LOW GAIN MASTER REMOTE ST IN SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 +10 0 +10 5 0 +10 5 0 0 5 0 15 5 0 15 5 0 15 5 0 15 5 0 15 0 5 15 5 15 20 10 5 0 5 15 20 10 0 10 5 15 20 10 0 5 15 0 5 15 5 15 20 10 20 10 0 5 15 20 10 5 15 10 5 10 10 5 15 5 20 10 20 10 15 15 20 20 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 30 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 30 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 50 60 70 60 70 40 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 ON ST IN 2 USER DEFINED KEYS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ST IN Section (p. 12) 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 BUS 1 BUS 2 BUS 3 BUS 4 BUS 5 BUS 6 BUS 7 BUS 8 Channel Strip Section (p. 11) ON 0 5 0 0 10 20 10 SEL SOLO ST IN 1 0 5 5 10 ON SEL SOLO 5 5 5 5 10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 5 5 10 10 20 10 0 +10 5 5 5 0 10 0 +10 5 5 5 10 0 +10 0 +10 5 5 10 20 10 0 +10 5 5 10 20 10 0 +10 5 5 10 20 10 0 +10 5 5 10 20 10 0 +10 5 5 10 20 10 0 +10 5 5 10 10 0 +10 5 5 SEL STEREO STEREO Section (p. 11) USER DEFINED KEYS Section (p. 14) Note: Screw holes for attaching a cover are located at both sides of the AD input section of the 01V96i. (Size M3, horizontal spacing 417 mm, vertical spacing 36 mm.) You may wish to fabricate your own cover and attach it to the front panel to prevent the controls from being operated inadvertently. Yamaha does not sell such a cover. If you fabricate and attach your own cover, make sure that the mounting screws do not extend more than 10 mm into the front panel. You will need to allow approximately 15–20 mm between the top panel and the cover in order to clear the control knobs and buttons. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Control Surface & Rear Panel DISPLAY ACCESS Section (p. 12) SCENE MEMORY Section (p. 14) 10 Control Surface & Rear Panel AD Input Section CH1-4 1 2 3 4 5 9 10 11 12 13 15 14 16 1 A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B 2 INPUT (BAL) INSERT 3 4 5 6 7 8 OUT IN (UNBAL) INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB CH15/16 2TR IN PAD -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL 1 INPUT connectors A/B INPUT A connectors are balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors that accept line-level and microphone signals. Each of the phantom [+48V] switches on the rear panel turns on or off the +48V phantom power feed to the corresponding input. INPUT B connectors are balanced TRS phone-type connectors that accept line-level and microphone signals. The nominal signal level of both types of connectors ranges from –60 dB to +4 dB. Phantom power is not supplied to these connectors. If you connect cables to INPUT A and INPUT B connectors of the same number, only the signal from INPUT B is effective. 1 (ground) Male XLR plug 3 (cold) 13 +4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 PEAK 14 15 SIGNAL PEAK 16 SIGNAL cable to insert an external effects processor to AD input channels. To processor’s input Connect to INSERT jack 1/4" phone plug Tip (send) Ring (return) Sleeve (ground) Tip (send) Sleeve (ground) 1/4" phone plug 1/4" phone plug Tip (return) Sleeve (ground) From processor’s output 4 PAD switches These switches turn on or off the 20 dB pad (attenuator) for each AD Input. 5 GAIN controls 2 (hot) Tip (hot) 1/4" TRS phone plug Ring (cold) Sleeve (ground) 2 INPUT connectors 13–16 These balanced TRS phone-type connectors accept line-level signals. The nominal signal level ranges from –26 dB to +4 dB. INPUT 15 & 16 connectors are available only when the AD 15/16 button is turned off. 3 INSERT I/O connectors These unbalanced TRS phone-type connectors are used for channel insert ins and outs. Use a split 01V96i—Owner’s Manual These controls adjust input sensitivity for each AD Input. Input sensitivity is –16 dB to –60 dB when the Pad is off, and +4 dB to –40 dB when the Pad is on. 6 PEAK indicators These indicators light up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping. Adjust the Pad switch and GAIN control so that the indicator rarely lights up at signal peak. 7 SIGNAL indicators These indicators light up when the input signal level exceeds –34 dB. 8 AD15/16 selector This button selects AD Input Channel 15 and 16 signals. When the button is turned on (pushed in), the 2TR IN signals (page 17) are selected. When the button is turned off (raised), the INPUT 15 and 16 signals are selected. 11 Control Surface Monitor Out & Headphones Section CH5-8 CH9-12 PHANTOM +48V L 1 R IN 2TR -10dBV (UNBAL) PHONES 2 MONITOR 2TR IN 3 4 0 LEVEL 10 MONITOR OUT 0 LEVEL 10 PHONES 1 [SEL] buttons These buttons enable you to select desired channels. The [SEL] button indicator for the currently-selected channel lights up. The channel selected by each [SEL] button depends on the layer selected in the LAYER section (see page 13). These buttons also allow you to create or cancel channel pairs, and add channels to (or remove them from) Fader, Mute, EQ, and Compressor groups. 1 SEL 2 SOLO 3 ON 1 +10 5 0 10 5 2 [SOLO] buttons 1 2TR IN/OUT connectors These unbalanced RCA phono connectors input and output line-level signals, and are typically used to connect an external recorder. When the AD15/16 selector in the AD Input section (8) is turned on (pushed in), the signals input at the 2TR IN connectors are routed to AD Input Channels 15 and 16. When the Monitor Source selector (2) is turned on (pushed in), you can monitor the 2TR IN signals from the MONITOR OUT connectors. The 2TR OUT signals are always the same as the STEREO OUT signals. 2 Monitor Source selector This button selects the signals output from the MONITOR OUT connectors on the rear panel. When this button is turned on (pushed in), you can monitor the signals input from the 2TR IN connectors. When the button is turned off (raised), you can monitor the Stereo Out signals or soloed channel signals. 3 MONITOR LEVEL control This control adjusts the monitoring level of the signals output from the MONITOR OUT connectors. 4 PHONES LEVEL control This control sets the level of the PHONES. 5 PHONES jack These buttons solo the selected channels. The [SOLO] button indicator of the currently-soloed channel lights up. 0 5 15 10 20 15 30 20 40 30 50 40 60 70 50 4 3 [ON] buttons 1 17 AUX 1 These buttons turn the selected channels on or off. The [ON] button indicators for On channels light up. 4 Channel faders Depending on the button selected in the FADER MODE section (see page 12), these faders adjust the selected channel input levels or the Bus Out or Aux Out levels. STEREO Section 1 SEL 1 [SEL] button Selects the Stereo Out. 2 2 [ON] button ON Turns the Stereo Out on or off. 3 [STEREO] fader This 100mm motorized fader adjusts the final output level of the Stereo Out. 0 5 10 15 You can connect a set of stereo headphones to this stereo phone jack. The signals output from the MONITOR OUT connectors are also output from this jack. 20 30 40 50 60 70 3 STEREO 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Control Surface & Rear Panel 5 OUT Channel Strip Section 12 Control Surface & Rear Panel ST IN Section DISPLAY ACCESS Section 1 2 3 4 1 ST IN DISPLAY ACCESS 2 SEL SEL 6 5 3 SOLO SOLO 4 ON ST IN 1 ON SCENE DIO/SETUP PAN/ / INSERT/ ROUTING DELAY DYNAMICS EQ MIDI UTILITY PAIR/ GROUP PATCH EFFECT VIEW 7 8 ST IN 2 9 0 A B 5 1 [SCENE] button 1 [ST IN] button This button selects an ST IN channel pair (ST IN Channels 1 & 2 or 3 & 4) which you can control using the buttons and controls in the ST IN section. The indicators to the right of the button indicate the available ST IN channels. 2 [SEL] buttons 2 [DIO/SETUP] button This button displays a DIO/Setup page, enabling you to set up the 01V96i, including digital input and output setup and remote control setup. 3 [MIDI] button These buttons select the ST IN channel you want to control. 3 [SOLO] buttons 4 [ON] buttons These buttons turn the ST IN channels on or off. 5 Level controls These controls adjust the ST IN channel levels. FADER MODE Section FADER MODE AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 2 HOME (METER) 1 [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] buttons These buttons enable you to select the Aux Send you wish to control. Pressing one of these buttons switches the Fader mode (see page 22), and displays the corresponding Aux page. (The selected button’s indicator lights up.) You can now adjust the send level of signals routed from Input Channels to the corresponding Aux buses by using the faders. 2 [HOME] button This button recalls Meter pages that display Input Channel levels or Output Channel (Bus Out, Aux Out, Stereo Out) levels (see page 23). 01V96i—Owner’s Manual This button displays a MIDI page, enabling you to make MIDI settings. 4 [UTILITY] button These buttons solo the selected ST IN channels. 1 This button displays a Scene page, enabling you to store and recall Scenes. This button displays a Utility page, enabling you to use the internal oscillators and view information about installed optional cards. 5[ /INSERT/DELAY] button This button displays a /INS/DLY page, enabling you to switch the signal phase, set the signal to be inserted, or set the delay parameters. 6 [PAN/ROUTING] button This button displays a Pan/Route page, enabling you to select a Bus to which the selected channel signal is routed, adjust the selected channel pan settings, adjust the level of signals routed from Buses 1–8 to the Stereo Bus, and adjust the stereo or surround pan settings. 7 [PAIR/GROUP] button This button displays a Pair/Group page, enabling you to create or cancel channel pairs and group multiple channel faders or [ON] buttons. 8 [PATCH] button This button displays a Patch page, enabling you to patch input signals and Bus Out signals to Input channels, or patch signals to the desired output connectors. 9 [DYNAMICS] button This button displays a Dynamics page, enabling you to control channel gates and compressors. 13 Control Surface 0 [EQ] button Display Section This button displays an EQ page, enabling you to set the equalizer and attenuator of the selected channel. A [EFFECT] button OVER 0 This button displays an Effect page, enabling you to edit the internal effects processors and use optional plug-in cards. -3 -6 -9 -12 -15 2 -18 1 -24 -30 -36 B [VIEW] button -48 STEREO LAYER Section LAYER 1-16 17-32 1 5 4 6 1 Display MASTER REMOTE 2 3 1 [1–16]/[17–32] buttons These buttons select an Input Channel layer as the layer controlled in the Channel Strip section. When the [1–16] button is turned on, you can control Channels 1–16. When the [17–32] button is turned on, you can control Channels 17–32. (See page 21 for more information on the Input Channel layers.) 2 [MASTER] button This button selects the Master Layer as the layer controlled in the Channel Strip section. You can use this layer to control Bus Outs and AUX Sends. (See page 21 for more information on the Master layer.) 3 [REMOTE] button This button selects the Remote Layer as the layer controlled in the Channel Strip section. You can use this layer to control external MIDI devices or computer-based DAWs. This is a 320 x 240 dot LCD display with a backlight. 2 Stereo meters These 12-segment level meters display the final output level of the Stereo Bus. 3 Contrast control This control adjusts the display contrast. 4 [F1]–[F4] buttons These buttons select a page from a multi-page screen. Selecting a tab at the bottom of the screen using one of these buttons displays the corresponding page. (See page 20 for more information on displaying a page.) 5 Left Tab Scroll [ ] button 6 Right Tab Scroll [ ] button If there are more pages available than the four whose tabs are currently displayed, use these buttons to display the additional tabs. These buttons are available only when the left or right Tab Scroll arrow appears. Tip: The ST IN section is not affected by the layer settings. Tab Scroll arrow 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Control Surface & Rear Panel 3 This button displays a View page, enabling you to view and set mix parameters for a specific channel. 14 Control Surface & Rear Panel SELECTED CHANNEL Section SCENE MEMORY Section SCENE MEMORY 1 STORE 6 2 Q RECALL 1 HIGH 2 3 3 7 HIGH-MID 4 FREQUENCY LOW-MID 5 8 GAIN LOW 1 [STORE] button This button enables you to store the current mix settings. (See page 42 for more information on Scene Memories.) 2 Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons 1 [PAN] control This control adjusts the pan of the channel selected by the [SEL] button. 2 [HIGH] button 3 [HIGH-MID] button 4 [LOW-MID] button 5 [LOW] button These buttons select the EQ band (HIGH, HIGH-MID, LOW-MID, LOW) of the channel selected by the [SEL] button. The corresponding button indicator of the currently-selected band lights up. These buttons select a Scene to store or recall. Pressing the Scene Up [ ] button increments the selection; pressing the Scene Down [ ] button decrements the selection. Holding down either key increments or decrements the selection continuously. 3 [RECALL] button This button recalls the Scene memory selected by the Scene Up [ ] / Down [ ] buttons. USER DEFINED KEYS Section 6 [Q] control USER DEFINED KEYS This control adjusts the currently-selected band Q. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 7 [FREQUENCY] control This control adjusts the currently-selected band frequency. 1 8 [GAIN] control This control adjusts the currently-selected band gain. 1 [1]–[8] buttons You can assign any of the 167 functions to these User Defined buttons. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 15 Control Surface Data Entry Section SOLO Section 1 [SOLO] indicator 3 1 This indicator flashes when single or multiple channels are soloed. SOLO CLEAR 1 2 2 [CLEAR] button DEC INC This button “unsolos” all soloed Channels. Control Surface & Rear Panel 4 2 ENTER 1 Parameter wheel This control adjusts the parameter values shown on the display. Turning it clockwise increases the value; turning it counterclockwise decreases the value. This wheel also enables you to scroll a displayed list and select a character for entry (see page 21). 2 [ENTER] button This button activates a selected (highlighted) button on the display, and confirms the edited parameter values. 3 [DEC]/[INC] buttons These buttons increment or decrement a parameter value by one. Pressing the [INC] button increments the value; pressing the [DEC] button decrements the value. Holding down either key increments or decrements the value continuously. 4 Left, Right, Up, Down ([ ]/[ ]/[ ]/[ ]) cursor buttons These buttons move the cursor around the display pages, or select parameters and options. Holding down a cursor button moves the cursor continuously in the corresponding direction. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 16 Control Surface & Rear Panel Rear Panel PHANTOM +48V (p. 16) AD Output Section (p. 16) Power Section (p. 18) 2 AD Output Section 1 1 CH1–4 ON/OFF switch 2 CH5–8 ON/OFF switch 3 CH9–12 ON/OFF switch Each of these switches turns on or off the +48V phantom power feed to four corresponding inputs. When the switches are on, +48V phantom power is supplied to the INPUT A connectors. 1 • Make sure that this switch is turned off if phantom power is not required. • Before you turn on phantom power, make sure that only devices requiring phantom power (such as condenser mics) are connected. Supplying phantom power to a device that does not require it will cause malfunctions. • Do not connect or disconnect a device while phantom power is on. Doing so will damage the device or the console. • To protect your speakers, make sure that the power amps (powered speakers) are off before you turn phantom power on or off. We also recommend that all output level faders be minimized. If you fail to observe these precautions, high volume output may occur, possibly damaging your hearing or your equipment. 2 3 1 MONITOR OUT connectors L/R Tip (hot) 1/4" TRS phone plug Ring (cold) Sleeve (ground) Note: 01V96i—Owner’s Manual MIDI/USB Section (p. 17) SLOT Section (p. 18) PHANTOM +48V 3 Digital I/O Section (p. 17) These balanced TRS phone-type connectors output monitoring signals or 2TR IN signals. The nominal signal level is +4 dB. You can select signals using the Monitor Source selector. 2 OMNI OUT connectors 1–4 Tip (hot) 1/4" TRS phone plug Ring (cold) Sleeve (ground) These balanced TRS phone-type connectors output any Bus signals or channel Direct Out signals. The nominal signal level is +4 dB. Rear Panel 3 STEREO OUT connectors L/R 17 MIDI/USB Section 2 (hot) Female XLR plug 3 (cold) 1 (ground) 1 2 1 MIDI IN/THRU/OUT ports Digital I/O Section These standard MIDI IN, OUT and THRU ports enable you to connect the 01V96i to other MIDI equipment. 2 TO HOST USB port This USB port enables you to connect a computer equipped with a USB 2.0 port. Note when using the TO HOST USB port 1 2 3 4 5 1 WORD CLOCK OUT connector This BNC connector outputs a wordclock signal from the 01V96i to a connected external device. 2 WORD CLOCK IN connector This BNC connector inputs a wordclock signal from a connected external device to the 01V96i. 3 ADAT IN/OUT connectors These optical connectors input and output ADAT digital audio signals. 4 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL This RCA phono connector outputs consumer format (IEC 60958) digital audio. The connector is typically used to connect the digital stereo input (consumer format) of a DAT recorder, MD recorder, or CD recorder. 5 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL This RCA phono connector accepts consumer format (IEC 60958) digital audio. The connector is typically used to connect the digital stereo output (consumer format) of a DAT recorder, MD recorder, or CD recorder. When connecting the 01V96i to a computer via the TO HOST USB port, please take the following measures. If you fail to take these measures, your computer or the 01V96i may stop operating (hang up), or data may be lost or damaged. If the computer or console stops operating, turn the power off and on again, and reboot the computer. • Before connecting the TO HOST USB port to your computer, disable the power conservation (suspend/sleep/standby/hibernate) settings of your computer. • Connect the TO HOST USB port to the computer before you power-on the console. • Before powering the console on/off or connecting/disconnecting the USB cable, you must do the following. - Close all applications. - Make sure that the console is not transmitting data. (The console also transmits data when you operate its buttons or move its faders.) • Leave an interval of at least six seconds between powering the console off and on, or between disconnecting and reconnecting the USB cable. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Control Surface & Rear Panel These balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors output the Stereo Out signals. The nominal signal level is +4 dB. 18 Control Surface & Rear Panel SLOT Section Follow the steps below to install an optional mini-YGDAI card. 1. Make sure that the power to the 01V96i is turned off. 2. Undo the two fixing screws and remove the slot cover, as shown below. 1 Keep the cover and fixing screws in a safe place for future use. 1 SLOT Optional mini-YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) I/O cards can be installed in this slot. You can install AD/DA cards or digital I/O cards supporting a variety of digital formats including AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam. Input signals from an I/O card can be patched to any desired input channel or insert-in (see page 29). The output signal of any desired bus or the direct signal of an input channel can be patched to an output of an I/O card (see page 30). Power Section 3. Insert the card between the guide rails 1 POWER ON/OFF switch This switch turns the power to the 01V96i on or off. and slide it all the way into the slot, as shown below. 1 2 You may have to push firmly to fully insert the card into the internal connector. Note: To prevent loud clicks and thumps in your speakers, turn on your audio equipment in the following order (reverse this order when turning the equipment off)—sound sources, multitrack and master recorders, 01V96i, monitoring power amplifiers. 2 AC IN connector This connector enables you to connect the 01V96i to an AC outlet via the supplied power cord. Be sure to plug the AC power cord into this connector before plugging the power cord into an AC outlet. Caution Even when the POWER ON/OFF switch is in the off position, a small amount of electricity is still flowing to the unit. When you are not using the 01V96i for a long time, make sure to unplug the AC power cord from the AC outlet. Caution Installing an Optional Card Visit the following Yamaha Pro Audio web site to ensure that the card you are installing is supported by the 01V96i. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ 01V96i—Owner’s Manual When inserting the card, align both sides of the card with the guide rails in the slot of the host device. 4. Secure the card using the attached thumbscrews. Tighten the screws firmly to secure the card. Otherwise, the card may not be grounded correctly. Operating Basics 19 5 MIDI indicator Operating Basics This chapter describes basic operations on the 01V96i, including how to use the display and operate the controls on the top panel. This indicator appears when the 01V96i is receiving MIDI data via the MIDI IN port, USB port, or an installed card. 6 Surround mode indicator This indicator identifies the currently-selected Surround mode (ST=stereo, 3-1, 5.1, or 6.1). 7 Sampling rate indicator About the Display The top panel display indicates various parameters that you must set before you can operate the 01V96i. The display indicates the following items: This indicator identifies the 01V96i’s current sampling rate: 44.1 kHz (44k), 48 kHz (48k), 88.2 kHz (88k), or 96 kHz (96k). 8 ST IN channel levels These level controls indicate the level of ST IN channels 1–4. 2 1 3 4 5 67 8 0 This section indicates the title of the current page. 0 Channel name 9 On certain pages, this area displays the Long name of the channel currently selected by the [SEL] key or the channel selected by the cursor keys. A Page area This page area displays various page contents. B Page tabs These tabs enable you to select a display page. C Tab Scroll arrows A B C These arrows indicate that more pages are available. 1 Selected DISPLAY This section indicates the currently-selected display page group. 2 Selected channel This section indicates the Input or Output Channel currently selected by its corresponding [SEL] button. The first four characters are the Channel ID (e.g., CH1–CH32, BUS1–BUS8, AUX1–AUX8, ST-L, ST-R). The second four characters are the channel’s Short name. You can edit the short name if you desire (see page 43). 3 Current Scene This section indicates the number and title of the currently-selected Scene memory. If the selected Scene is write-protected, a padlock icon ( ) appears. 4 EDIT indicator This indicator appears when the current mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was most-currently recalled. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Operating Basics 9 Page title 20 Operating Basics Selecting Display Pages Display Interface To select a display page: This section describes how to use the display interface. 1. Press the corresponding button on the top panel to select the desired page group. Rotary Controls & Faders Display pages are grouped by function. To select a page group, press the desired button in the DISPLAY ACCESS section. The rotary controls and faders enable you to adjust the continuously variable parameter values, including Input Channel levels and effects parameters. Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a rotary control or fader you want to adjust, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the value. 2. You can select pages that have currently-displayed tabs by pressing the [F1]–[F4] buttons. If the selected display page group contains multiple pages, press the [F1]–[F4] buttons below the corresponding tab to select a specific page. 3. To select a page for which a tab is not currently displayed, press either the Left or Right [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll button (depending on where the page is located) to display the page tab, then press the corresponding [F1]–[F4] button. If display page groups contain more than four pages, either the left or right arrow appears. To display the currently-hidden tabs, press the Right or Left [ ]/[ ] Tab Scroll button. You can also select a page from a page group as follows: • Selecting the next page in a page group: Press the button you selected in Step 1 repeatedly. This enables you to select a page that has a hidden tab. • To select the previous page in a page group: Press and hold down the button you selected in Step 1. The screen steps back through the pages one by one. Release the button when the desired page is displayed. This enables you to select a page that has a hidden tab. • To select the first page in the group: Double-click the button you selected in Step 1. 4. Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor (a bold frame) to a button, parameter box, rotary control, or fader so that you can change the value. Tip: The 01V96i remembers the current page and parameter when you select a new page group. If you return to the previous page group, the 01V96i displays the correct page, with the same parameter selected. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Buttons The buttons enable you to turn certain functions on (enabled) or off (disabled). Move the cursor to the appropriate button, then press the [ENTER] button to turn the function on (highlighted) or off. The buttons also enable you to select one of two options or to execute certain functions. Parameter Boxes The parameter boxes enable you to select one of multiple options. Press the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a parameter box, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select the setting. You may need to press the [ENTER] button to confirm a change in certain parameter boxes. If you edit a value in this type of parameter box, the value flashes. Press the [ENTER] button to confirm the change, and the flashing stops. If you move the cursor to other parameters while the edited value is flashing, the edit is cancelled. 21 Selecting Layers Confirmation Messages For certain functions, the 01V96i prompts you for confirmation before executing the functions, as shown here. Selecting Layers Input Channels and Output Channels (Bus Outs & Aux Outs) are arranged into layers, as illustrated below. There are four layers altogether. Input Channel Layer 17–32 Input Channel Layer 1–16 Move the cursor to YES and press [ENTER] to execute the function, or move the cursor to NO and press [ENTER] to cancel. If you take no action for awhile, the confirmation window closes automatically and the function is not executed. The Title Edit window enables you to enter titles for Scene and library memories. You can enter 4, 12, or 16 characters, depending on the item. The figure on the left shows uppercase characters and various punctuation marks. The figure on the right shows lowercase characters and numbers. Remote Layer Master Layer The currently-selected LAYER layer determines the function of the channel 1-16 17-32 MASTER REMOTE strip, [SEL] buttons, [SOLO] buttons, [ON] buttons, and faders. Use the LAYER buttons to select a layer you wish to edit using the channel strip controls. The following table shows the layers that you can access using the LAYER buttons, and the parameters you can control using the channel strips on each layer. Use the cursor buttons to select characters, and press the [ENTER] button to enter them into the title. The cursor moves to the right automatically as each character is entered. Use the Parameter wheel to move the cursor within the title. Use the SHIFT LOCK button to select uppercase or lowercase characters, and use the SPC button to enter a space. To insert a space at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the right, move the cursor to the INS button and press [ENTER]. To delete the character at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the left, move the cursor to the DEL button and press [ENTER]. When you have finished, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to confirm the title. To cancel the title entry, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press [ENTER]. LAYER buttons Layers Channel Strips 1–8 9–16 [1–16] button Input Channel Input Channels 1–16 Layer 1–16 [17–32] button Input Channel Input Channels 17–32 Layer 17–32 [REMOTE] Remote Layer button Operation depends on the selected target. [MASTER] Master Layer button Aux Send masters 1–8 Bus Out masters 1–8 Tip: • The function of each channel strip fader depends on the currently-selected Fader mode (see page 22). • The STEREO [SEL] button, [ON] button, and [STEREO] fader always control the Stereo Out signal, regardless of the Layer settings. • The ST IN [SEL] buttons, [SOLO] buttons, [ON] buttons, and level control knobs always adjust the ST IN channels selected via the [ST IN] button regardless of the Layer settings. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Operating Basics Title Edit Window 22 Operating Basics Selecting Channels Selecting Fader Modes To select a channel on the 01V96i, press the corresponding [SEL] button. To adjust the Pan and EQ settings, use the rotary controls in the SELECTED CHANNEL section. To select a channel on pages that cover multiple channels, press the corresponding [SEL] button. The function of channel faders (1–16) depends on the selected Layer and Fader mode. 1. Select a layer that includes the desired channel (see page 21). Q 1. Press the corresponding LAYER button to select a layer that includes the desired channel (see page 21). To select ST IN channels, press the [ST IN] button. HIGH 2. Press the FADER MODE buttons to select a Fader mode. FADER MODE HIGH-MID FREQUENCY LOW-MID GAIN LOW 2. Use the corresponding [SEL] button to select the desired channel. The channel is selected and the [SEL] button indicator lights up. The Channel’s ID and short name appear in the upper-left corner of the display. If the currently-displayed page contains a relevant channel parameter, the cursor moves to that parameter automatically. If the currently-displayed page contains no such parameter, a page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically. Tip: For paired Input or Output Channels, the channel for which you pressed the [SEL] button is selected, and its indicator lights up. The [SEL] button indicator of the paired partner flashes. 3. To select the Stereo Out, press the STEREO [SEL] button. Repeatedly pressing the STEREO [SEL] button toggles between the Stereo Out left and Stereo Out right channels. If the currently-displayed page contains a relevant Stereo Out parameter, the cursor moves to that parameter automatically. If the currently-displayed page contains no such parameter, a page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically. AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 HOME (METER) The button indicators identify the following Fader modes: • When the [HOME] button indicator lights up: You can use channel faders to control Input Channels and ST IN Channel levels or Output Channels (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8) master levels. • When one of the [AUX1]–[AUX8] button indicators light up: You can use channel faders to control the corresponding Aux Send level. The following table shows the channel fader functions for each Layer and Fader mode. LAYER buttons [1–16] button [17–32] button Fader Mode 1–8 9–16 [HOME] button Input Channel 1–16 level [AUX1]–[AUX8] buttons Input Channel 1–16 Aux Send level [HOME] button Input Channel 17–32 level [AUX1]–[AUX8] buttons Input Channel 17–32 Aux Send level [HOME] button [REMOTE] [AUX1]–[AUX8] button buttons [MASTER] button Channel Strip Fader Operation depends on the selected target. [HOME] button Aux Send master 1–8 output level [AUX1]–[AUX8] buttons No operation Bus Out master1–8 output level Note: You cannot select the [AUX1]–[AUX8] buttons while the Master layer is selected. If you switch to the Master layer while one of the [AUX1]–[AUX8] button indicators is lit, the indicator automatically turns off and the [HOME] button indicator lights up. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Metering 23 3. Press the FADER MODE [HOME] button Metering This section describes how to check Input and Output Channel levels using the Meter pages. 1. Press the FADER MODE [HOME] button repeatedly until the Meter | Position page appears. repeatedly until the page listed below that contains the desired channels appears. • CH1-32 page This page displays the Input Channel 1–32 levels respectively. This page enables you to set the metering position for Input and Output Channels. 1 2 1 INPUT section This section enables you to select the metering position for Input Channel and ST IN Channel signals. 2 OUTPUT section This section enables you to select the metering position for Output Channel (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8, Stereo Out) signals. 2. Move the cursor to the desired parameter button in the INPUT or OUTPUT section, then press [ENTER]. You can select one of the following three positions in each section. • PRE EQ ................Immediately before EQ. • PRE FADER ........Immediately before the fader. • POST FADER.....Immediately after the fader. • Master page This section displays the Output Channel (Aux Out 1–8, Bus Out 1–8, Stereo Out) levels altogether. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Operating Basics • ST IN page This page displays the left and right ST IN Channel 1–4 levels separately. 24 Operating Basics • Effect page This page displays the internal effects processor 1–4 input and output levels altogether. • Stereo page This page displays the Stereo Out output level. If you selected the CH1-32 page or the Master page, use the MASTER MODE parameter to select one of the following three metering signal types: • GATE GR.............The amount of gain reduction for the gate (only for CH1-32) • COMP GR ...........The amount of gain reduction for the compressor • LEVEL ..................Input Channel input level, or Output Channel output level Tip: These pages also allow you to change the metering position using the POSITION parameter. This parameter setting operates in unison with the Meter | Position page setting. 4. To activate the Peak Hold function, move the cursor to the PEAK HOLD button, then press [ENTER]. The PEAK HOLD button turns on, and the peak level is held on the meters on the page. To cancel the Peak Hold function, turn the PEAK HOLD button off. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Connections and Setup 25 Connections and Setup This chapter explains how to connect and set up your 01V96i. Connections The following section explains two typical ways to connect the 01V96i to external equipment, although there are numerous others. ■ Configuring an analog 16–24-channel mixing system Synthesizer Synthesizer MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Integrated Sampling Sequencer Real-time External Control Surface Modular Synthesis Plug-in System Integrated Sampling Sequencer Real-time External Control Surface Modular Synthesis Plug-in System SONG SCENE SONG SCENE REC REC Optional AD card (adds 8 input channels) Connections and Setup Effects processor External recorder SLOT CH1-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 CH5-8 12 13 15 14 16 CH9-12 PHANTOM +48V L INPUT connector A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B B R IN INPUT OUT 2TR (BAL) -10dBV (UNBAL) PHONES 2TR IN connector INSERT OUT IN (UNBAL) INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O CH15/16 2TR IN INSERT I/O MONITOR 2TR IN PAD 20dB OMNI OUT connector 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB +4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 0 LEVEL 10 MONITOR OUT -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL DISPLAY ACCESS DIO/SETUP SCENE 13 PEAK 14 15 SIGNAL 0 LEVEL 10 PHONES 2TR OUT connector PEAK 16 SIGNAL SCENE MEMORY MIDI UTILITY STORE RECALL SOLO CLEAR OVER PAN/ / INSERT/ ROUTING DELAY PAIR/ GROUP PATCH EFFECT VIEW 0 -3 -6 EQ DYNAMICS DEC INC -9 -12 FADER MODE -15 -18 -24 -30 AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 -36 HIGH Q -48 STEREO AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 HIGH-MID FREQUENCY HOME (METER) MONITOR OUT connectors LOW-MID LAYER ENTER 1-16 INPUT connector Guitar LOW GAIN MASTER REMOTE ST IN SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 SEL SEL SEL SOLO SOLO VOL +10 INPUT connector 17-32 0 +10 5 0 +10 5 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 5 15 0 +10 5 15 15 15 0 15 0 5 15 5 5 10 15 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 20 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 30 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 30 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 50 60 70 60 70 40 50 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 ON VOL Monitoring system ST IN 2 0 5 10 15 0 10 10 5 ON ST IN 1 5 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 ON 15 40 USER DEFINED KEYS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PHONES jack 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 BUS 1 BUS 2 BUS 3 BUS 4 BUS 5 BUS 6 BUS 7 BUS 8 STEREO This illustration shows a simple system with 16 analog channels using the 01V96i’s INPUT connectors 1–16. If an optional AD card (such as the MY8-AD or MY8-AD96) is installed in the slot, up to 24 analog channels can be mixed. Tip: You can adjust the gain of the AD card channels by setting the DIP switches on the card. For more information, see your AD card documentation. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 26 Connections and Setup ■ Configuring a recording system that uses a DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) TO HOST USB port Computer Effects processor CH1-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 CH5-8 12 13 15 14 16 CH9-12 PHANTOM +48V L INPUT connector A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B B R IN INPUT OUT 2TR (BAL) -10dBV (UNBAL) PHONES INSERT OUT IN (UNBAL) INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB CH15/16 2TR IN MONITOR 2TR IN PAD OMNI OUT connector Synthesizer +4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 0 LEVEL 10 MONITOR OUT -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL DISPLAY ACCESS DIO/SETUP SCENE 13 PEAK 14 15 SIGNAL 0 LEVEL 10 PHONES PEAK 16 SIGNAL SCENE MEMORY MIDI UTILITY PAIR/ GROUP PATCH STORE RECALL SOLO CLEAR OVER PAN/ / INSERT/ ROUTING DELAY 0 -3 MUSIC PRODUCTION SYNTHESIZER Integrated Sampling Sequencer Real-time External Control Surface Modular Synthesis Plug-in System -6 EQ DYNAMICS EFFECT DEC INC -9 VIEW -12 FADER MODE -15 -18 -24 SONG SCENE -30 REC AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 -36 HIGH Q -48 STEREO HIGH-MID FREQUENCY HOME (METER) MONITOR OUT connectors LOW-MID LAYER ENTER 1-16 INPUT connector LOW GAIN MASTER REMOTE ST IN SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 +10 INPUT connector 17-32 SEL 0 +10 5 0 +10 5 15 15 15 10 20 10 15 30 15 30 15 20 40 20 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 30 40 50 1 20 10 2 15 20 10 3 15 15 15 15 15 5 15 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 30 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 40 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 50 60 70 60 70 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 11 15 30 15 30 15 10 5 10 40 20 30 15 40 20 12 13 14 VOL VOL Monitoring system ON ST IN 2 0 5 20 30 15 9 5 20 40 20 8 15 20 10 20 10 7 0 10 15 0 10 5 20 10 20 10 6 15 SOLO ON 5 5 0 10 5 SEL ST IN 1 20 10 20 10 5 15 0 +10 5 0 10 5 SEL SOLO ON 20 10 20 10 20 10 4 15 5 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 20 10 20 10 20 10 0 +10 5 5 0 10 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 10 5 0 +10 5 5 0 SEL 15 USER DEFINED KEYS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PHONES jack 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 BUS 1 BUS 2 BUS 3 BUS 4 BUS 5 BUS 6 BUS 7 BUS 8 STEREO In this system, the 01V96i is connected to a computer-based DAW (Digital Audio Workstation). This allows the 01V96i to be used as an audio interface with 16-channel input and output. The 01V96i’s remote functionality can also be used to perform locate and transport operations on the DAW, and to edit its parameters. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Wordclock Connections and Settings Wordclock Connections and Settings 27 • Star Distribution In this example, a dedicated wordclock distribution box is used to supply wordclock signals from the wordclock master to each wordclock slave individually. About Wordclock Wordclock master Wordclock distribution box WC OUT (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) Device A Wordclock slave WC IN (BNC) Device B Wordclock slave WC IN (BNC) Device C Wordclock slave Device D Wordclock slave If the external devices do not have wordclock in and out connectors, you can use the clock information included in the digital audio signals. In this case, digital audio signals and wordclock signals are transferred via the 2TR OUT DIGITAL and 2TR IN DIGITAL jacks or via the digital I/O card installed in the rear panel slot. Digital audio signal + Wordclock signal Wordclock Connections Connections and Setup Digital audio equipment must be synchronized when digital audio signals are transferred from one device to another. Even if both devices use identical sampling rates, digital signals may not transfer correctly, or audible noise or unwanted clicks may occur if the digital audio processing circuits inside each digital audio device are not synchronized with each other. Wordclocks are signals that enable digital audio processing circuits to synchronize with each other. In a typical digital audio system, one device operates as the wordclock master, transmitting wordclock signals, and the other devices operate as wordclock slaves, synchronizing to the wordclock master. If you are digitally connecting the 01V96i to other equipment, you must decide which device to use as the wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves, then set up all the devices accordingly. The 01V96i can be used as the wordclock master running at either 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz, or slaved to an external wordclock source. External device To establish wordclock synchronization between the 01V96i and external devices, you can distribute wordclock signals independently via dedicated cables, or you can use clock information derived from digital audio connections. The WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors transmit and receive wordclock signals independently on the 01V96i. The following examples show two ways in which wordclock signals can be distributed and received via the WORD CLOCK IN and OUT connectors. Digital I/O card CH1-4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 CH5-8 12 13 15 14 16 CH9-12 PHANTOM +48V L A A A A A A A A A A A A B B B B B B B B B B B B R IN INPUT OUT 2TR (BAL) -10dBV (UNBAL) PHONES INSERT OUT IN (UNBAL) INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O INSERT I/O 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB 20dB CH15/16 2TR IN MONITOR 2TR IN PAD +4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 +4 GAIN -26 0 LEVEL 10 MONITOR OUT -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 -60 -16 GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN GAIN PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL PEAK SIGNAL DISPLAY ACCESS DIO/SETUP SCENE 13 PEAK 14 15 SIGNAL 0 LEVEL 10 PHONES PEAK 16 SIGNAL SCENE MEMORY MIDI UTILITY PAIR/ GROUP PATCH EFFECT VIEW STORE RECALL SOLO CLEAR OVER PAN/ / INSERT/ ROUTING DELAY 0 -3 -6 EQ DYNAMICS • Daisy Chain Distribution In this example, the wordclock signal is distributed in a “daisy-chain” fashion, with each device feeding the wordclock signal from the wordclock out connector on to the wordclock in connector of the next device. This method of distribution is not recommended for larger systems. INC -15 -18 -24 -30 AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 -36 HIGH Q -48 STEREO HIGH-MID FREQUENCY HOME (METER) LOW-MID LAYER ENTER 1-16 17-32 LOW GAIN MASTER REMOTE ST IN SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 1 +10 2 0 +10 5 3 0 +10 5 4 0 +10 5 5 0 +10 5 6 0 +10 5 8 7 0 +10 5 5 9 10 12 0 +10 5 5 5 5 11 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 0 +10 13 0 +10 5 14 15 0 +10 0 +10 ON 16 0 +10 5 5 5 SEL 5 5 10 10 15 15 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 10 20 20 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 15 30 30 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 20 40 30 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 30 60 40 70 50 50 50 60 70 60 70 5 0 15 50 5 0 15 5 0 10 5 15 5 0 10 5 15 5 10 5 15 5 0 0 10 5 15 15 15 5 15 5 0 5 15 5 0 5 15 15 15 0 10 10 10 5 5 0 0 10 5 5 5 0 10 10 10 10 5 5 0 0 10 5 5 5 0 10 5 5 15 ON ST IN 2 5 20 10 5 10 5 SEL SOLO ON 0 20 10 0 SEL SOLO ST IN 1 0 10 40 Wordclock master DEC -9 -12 FADER MODE 5 15 5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 BUS 1 BUS 2 BUS 3 BUS 4 BUS 5 BUS 6 BUS 7 BUS 8 40 USER DEFINED KEYS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 STEREO WC OUT (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC OUT (BNC) Device A Wordclock slave WC IN (BNC) Device B Wordclock slave WC OUT (BNC) WC IN (BNC) Device C Wordclock slave 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 28 Connections and Setup Specifying the Wordclock Source To digitally connect the 01V96i to external devices, you must specify the wordclock source for the system. Follow the steps below. Note: When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system, some devices may output noise due to being out of synchronization. Be sure to turn down your monitoring device before changing wordclock settings. 1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup | Word Clock page appears. On this page, you can view the current synchronization status of input signals at each slot and connector. 2. Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a source, then press [ENTER]. The following are possible wordclock sources. However, USB only displays the synchronization status, and cannot be selected as the wordclock master. • SLOT These buttons select the inputs from the digital I/O card installed in the slot as the wordclock source. Inputs are selected in pairs (odd and even numbers in this order). The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O card. The number of pairs depends on the type of I/O card installed. • adat These buttons select the inputs from the ADAT IN connector on the rear panel. Inputs are selected in pairs (odd and even numbers in this order). • WC IN This button selects the wordclock signal input at the WORD CLOCK IN connector on the rear panel. • 2TRD This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL input as the wordclock source. • INT 44.1k, INT 48k, INT 88.2k, INT 96k These buttons select the internal clock generator as the wordclock source. The 01V96i will function as the wordclock master. The source select button indicators are explained below: A usable wordclock signal is present at this input, and it is in sync with the current 01V96i internal clock. No wordclock signal is present at this input. A usable wordclock signal is present at this input, but it is out of sync with the current 01V96i internal clock. This input is the currently-selected wordclock source. This input was selected as the wordclock source, but no usable signal was received. Either this input is not receiving wordclock, or else it cannot be used with the currently-installed I/O card. Tip: • The FS box displays the sampling frequency at which the 01V96i is currently operating. • The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O card. • The IN and OUT columns indicate the number of input and output channels available for each installed I/O card. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual • USB (display only) This indicates the synchronization status of the signal being input from the TO HOST USB port. It cannot be selected as the wordclock master. Note: To transfer data at higher sampling frequencies (88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) between the 01V96i and connected external devices, you need to set the data transfer format. Tip: If wordclock transfer is interrupted while the 01V96i (being used as a slave unit) is receiving the clock signal, the unit will automatically switch to an internal clock (INT 44.1k/ INT 48k/INT 88.2k/INT 96k) that is closest to the interrupted clock. Input and Output Patching Input and Output Patching The 01V96i is designed to enable you to patch (assign) signals to Inputs and Outputs. This section explains how to view the signals patched to Inputs and Outputs and change the assignment. Tip: If the data from a connected instrument fails to be input, or if you are unable to monitor the signal at the desired output, check the I/O patching, as explained below: Patching Input Channels By default, the Input Channels are patched as follows: • INPUT connectors 1–16....Input Channels 1–16 • ADAT IN channels 1–8......Input Channels 17–24 • Slot channels 1–8.................Input Channels 25–32 • Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 1–4 .........ST IN Channels 1–4 Follow the steps below to view or change the patching. 1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] but- 1 • FX3-1–FX3-2 ............Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 3 • FX4-1–FX4-2 ............Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 4 • 2TD-L/R .....................2TR IN DIGITAL L/R connectors Follow the steps below to view or change the patching. 2. Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch parameter (1) for which you want to change the assignment, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching. 3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. Tip: To restore the default patching, recall Input Patch memory #00. Patching Omni Outs By default, the output connectors are patched as follows: • OMNI OUT connectors 1–4 .... Aux Out 1–4 • ADAT OUT channels 1–8......... Bus Out 1–8 • Slot channels 1–8 ........................ Bus Out 1–8 • Slot channels 9–16...................... Bus Out 1–8 • 2TR DIGITAL connectors........ Stereo Out L & R Tip: • The STEREO OUT connectors always output the Stereo Bus signals. • The MONITOR OUT connectors output monitor signals or the 2TR IN signals, depending on the Monitor Source selector setting. Follow the steps below to view or change the patching. 1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the following page appears. • • • • • • • Inputs and Slot channels that are currently assigned to Input Channels are shown in the parameter boxes (1) beneath the channel numbers. The parameter indicators are explained below: – ................................... No assignment AD1–AD16 ............... INPUT connectors 1–16 USB 1–USB 16.......... TO HOST USB port channels 1–16 ADAT1–ADAT8 ...... ADAT IN channels 1–8 SL-01–SL-16.............. Slot channels 1–16 FX1-1–FX1-2............ Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 1 FX2-1–FX2-2............ Outputs 1–2 of Internal Effects Processor 2 1 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Connections and Setup ton repeatedly until the following page appears. 29 30 • • • • • • • • • • • • Connections and Setup Signals that are currently assigned to the output connectors are shown in the parameter boxes (1) underneath the connector numbers. The parameter indicators are explained below: – ..........................................No assignment BUS1–BUS8 .....................Bus Out 1–8 signals AUX1–AUX8 ...................Aux Out 1–8 Signals ST L/R................................Stereo Out signals INS CH1–INS CH32......Input Channels 1–32 Insert Outs INS BUS1–INS BUS8 ....Bus Out 1–8 Insert Outs INS AUX1–INS AUX8 ..Aux Out 1–8 Insert Outs INS ST-L/ST-R ................Stereo Out Insert Outs CAS BUS1–BUS8 ...........Bus Out 1–8 Cascade Outs CAS AUX1–AUX8..........Aux Out 1–8 Cascade Outs CAS ST-L/ST-R ...............Stereo Out Cascade Outs CASSOLOL/CASSOLOR ..Solo Channel Cascade Outs Patching output signals to USB OUT By default, the following output signals are assigned to USB OUT. • USB OUT1–8 ..... Bus Out 1–8 signals • USB OUT9–16... Bus Out 1–8 signals If you want to change or verify this patching, proceed as follows. 1. Press [PATCH] repeatedly until the following page appears. 2. Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to a patch parameter (1) you wish to change, and rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching. 3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. Tip: To restore the default patching, recall Output Patch memory #00. • • • • • • • • The parameter boxes underneath each number indicate the currently-assigned signal routing. The meaning of these indicators are explained below. – ......................................... No assignment BUS1–BUS8..................... Bus Out 1–8 signals AUX1–AUX8................... Aux Out 1–8 signals ST L/R ............................... Stereo Out signals INS CH1–INS CH32..... Input Channels 1–32 Insert Outs INS BUS1–INS BUS8.... Bus Out 1–8 Insert Outs INS AUX1–INS AUX8.. Aux Out 1–8 Insert Outs INS ST-L/ST-R................ Stereo Out Insert Outs 2. Move the cursor to a parameter box, and use the Parameter wheel (or [INC]/[DEC]) to modify the patching. 3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Tutorial Tutorial This chapter describes operations on the 01V96i, organized according to their purpose. 31 3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. Note: Alternatively, you can move the cursor to the input channel’s parameter box and then press [ENTER], and make a selection in the “PATCH SELECT” box. In this case, select the desired input connector and channel number, and press [INC] to confirm the change. Input and Output Patching The 01V96i allows you to freely connect external input/output connectors to the inputs and outputs of the internal mixer. The procedure is as follows. Input Patching 1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | In Patch page page appears. Output Patching 1. Press the [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | Out Patch page appears. 2. Move the cursor to the parameter box of the input channel for which you want to change the assignment, and use the Parameter wheel or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching. By default, the patching will be as shown in the illustration. 2. As you did when making input patch settings, move the cursor to the parameter box of the output channel, and use the Parameter wheel or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to modify the patching. 3. Press [ENTER] to confirm the change. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Tutorial By default, signals from the instruments or mics connected to INPUT connectors 1–16 are sent to Input Channels 1–16. Input signals from the ADAT IN connector are sent to Input Channels 17–24, and input signals from the slot are sent to Input Channels 25–32. 32 Tutorial Setting the Input Levels The explanation here provides an example of adjusting the input level of the signals from instruments or mics connected to INPUT connectors, with the input patching in the default state. 1. While the musicians play the instruments or devices connected to the INPUT connector, adjust each [PAD] and [GAIN] so that [PEAK] flickers briefly when the maximum volume occurs.. Note: The [GAIN] controls adjust the analog input sensitivity. To make a high-quality recording with a wide dynamic range and little noise, set the [GAIN] controls as high as possible while avoiding clipping. 2. Press the LAYER [1–16] button. Input Channel Layer 1–16 is now available for control from the channel strip section. Note: Since the fader and [ON] button positions of each layer are memorized, those positions for the corresponding layer are restored when you switch to that layer. 3. Press the FADER MODE [HOME] button, then press the [F1] button to display the Meter | CH1-32 page. Meter pages are the start point for mixing and recording. They display channel input and output levels, and compressor and gate gain reduction amounts. The CH1-32 page enables you to view Input Channel 1–32 levels and compressor and gate gain reduction amounts. 1 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 2 4. Make sure that the LEVEL button (1) is turned on in the METER MODE section. The METER MODE section enables you to select the type of signals displayed on the meters. If any button other than the LEVEL button is turned on, move the cursor to the LEVEL button, then press [ENTER]. 5. Move the cursor to the POSITION parameter box (2) to the right of the LEVEL button, rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select “POST FADER,” then press [ENTER]. The POSITION parameter indicates the metering position. When “POST FADER” is selected, the meters indicate the post-fader signal levels. Note: If you set the POSITION parameter to “PRE EQ,” the pre-EQ input levels are metered. If you set the parameter to “PRE FADER,” the post-EQ and pre-fader input levels are metered. 6. Make sure that the [ON] button of the corresponding channel is on (lit), and raise the fader to the 0 dB position. 7. While the musicians play the musical instruments, check the input channel levels using the level meters on the display. Note: If the meters reach the “OVER” level, make sure that the faders are set to 0dB, then lower the corresponding [GAIN] controls. Pairing Channels 33 Pairing Channels Setting the Routing On the 01V96i, you can pair adjacent odd-even channels for stereo operation. Faders and most mix parameters of paired channels (excluding the Input Patch, phase, routing, and pan parameters) are linked. Pairing Input Channels is useful when you are connecting stereo sources, such as a CD player or synthesizer. To record the 01V96i input signals to an external device, you must specify the destination of the signals for each Input Channel. This process is called “routing.” There are two routing methods. 1. To pair adjacent odd-even Input Channels, press and hold the [SEL] button for one of the channels you wish to pair, and press the [SEL] button for the adjacent channel. The corresponding two channels are paired, and the settings (such as faders, channel on/off, etc.) of the first channel are copied to the second channel. Subsequently, adjusting the linked parameters of one of the paired channels will adjust the parameters of its partner in the same way. Parameters are copied. • Using Bus Outs 1–8 Input Channel signals are first routed to Buses 1–8, then through Bus Outs 1–8 to the output connectors or channels. Use this method if you want to mix the signals of multiple Input Channels for output. If you desire, you can process the signals using the Bus Out 1–8 compressors and EQs. In the following example, Input Channel signals are routed through Bus Outs 1 and 2 to ADAT OUT connectors 1 and 2. ADAT OUT connector INPUT connector 1 INPUT connector 2 INPUT connector 3 SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL INPUT connector 4 INPUT connector 5 Tip: You can still select one of the paired channels for control by pressing the corresponding [SEL] button. When you select the channel, the [SEL] button indicator lights up, and the [SEL] button for the paired partner flashes. button for one of the paired channels, and press the [SEL] button for the other channel. Note: If you want to operate the faders of paired channels, make sure you operate only one fader for the pair. If you try to operate the faders for both channels in the pair, an excessive load will be applied to the fader motor, causing malfunction. Bus Out 1 Input Channels 2 Bus Out 2 Input Channels 3 Bus Out 3 Input Channels 4 Bus Out 4 Input Channels 4 Bus Out 5 CH 2 Input Patch • Using Direct Outs Each Input Channel signal is directly routed to and output from the specified output connectors and channels. The following example illustrates the signals directly output from ADAT OUT channels 1–5. ADAT OUT connector INPUT connector 1 Input Channels 1 INPUT connector 2 Input Channels 2 INPUT connector 3 Input Channels 3 INPUT connector 4 Input Channels 4 INPUT connector 5 Input Channels 4 CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 CH 5 Input Patch 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Tutorial 2. To cancel a pair, press and hold the [SEL] CH 1 Input Channels 1 34 Tutorial This section describes how to route signals by combining the above two routing methods. 1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly to display the Pan/Route | Rout1-16 page. This page enables you to select a Bus Out as the signal destination for each channel. 3. To route Input Channel signals via Buses 1–8 to your recorder or DAW, use the 1–8 buttons to specify a Bus Out as the destination for each Input Channel to which an instrument or mic is connected. In this example, Input Channels 1–4 are assigned to Buses 1 and 2, and Input Channels 5–8 are assigned to Buses 3 and 4. 1 4. Press the [PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly to display the Pan/Route | Pan page. 2 3 This page contains the following buttons: This page enables you to set the panpots for signals routed from the Input Channels to the Stereo Bus, and for signals routed from the Input Channels to the odd-even buses. 1 1–8 buttons These buttons route Input Channel signals to Buses 1–8. You can select multiple buttons. 2 S button This button routes Input Channel signals to the Stereo Bus. 5. Move the cursor to the PAN parameter controls for the Input Channels that are assigned to the odd-even buses, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to set the pan. 3 D button This button routes Input Channel signals to the specified output connectors and channels directly. 2. Move the cursor to the S button for the Input Channel to which the musical instrument or microphone is connected, then press [ENTER] to turn it off. By default, each Input Channel is routed to the Stereo Bus, which enables you to monitor the signals from the MONITOR OUT connectors and the PHONES jack. However during multitrack recording, or when monitoring the sound with the DAW’s effects applied, you will usually want to monitor the signals returned from the recorder or DAW rather than the input signals themselves. To do so, you must turn off the S button so that the Input Channel signals will not be sent to the Stereo Bus. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Cursor on the PAN parameter control Tip: You can also use the [SEL] buttons to select Input Channels, and the SELECTED CHANNEL [PAN] control to adjust the pan setting. 6. To route Input Channel signals to Direct Outs, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | Direct Out page appears. The Direct Out page enables you to specify the output connectors or channels to which each Input Channel is directly patched. EQ’ing the Input Signals 7. Move the cursor to the parameter box for the Input Channels you want to route to Direct Outs, then specify the output connectors or channels. In this example, Input Channel 9–12 signals are routed to ADAT OUT channels 5–8. 35 EQ’ing the Input Signals The 01V96i’s Input Channels feature 4-band full parametric EQ. This section describes how to use the EQ of an Input Channel to adjust the tonal character. 1. Press the LAYER [1–16] button. Input Channel Layer 1–16 is now available for control from the channel strip section. 2. Press the [SEL] button for the Input Channel to which you want to apply EQ. 3. Press the [EQ] button, then the [F1] button to display the EQ | EQ Edit page. The EQ Edit page enables you to adjust the EQ parameters for the currently-selected channel. 8. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly until the Pan/Route | Rout1-16 page appears. 9. Move the cursor to the D button for the Input Channels you want to route to Direct Outs, then press [ENTER]. The Input Channels for which the D buttons are turned on are directly patched to the output connectors or channels specified in Step 7. 4. Make sure that the EQ ON button (in the upper-left corner) is turned ON. 5. While sound is being produced on the instrument or other device, adjust the EQ parameters. To do so, move the cursor to the parameters in the lower half of the page, then rotate the Parameter wheel to change the values. You can adjust the following parameters for the LOW, L-MID, H-MID, and HIGH bands individually. • Q This parameter control specifies the Q (slope) for cut/boost of the center frequency set via the F parameter control. The setting range is between 10 and 0.10. The higher the value, the steeper the slope becomes. This parameter control also selects the type of EQ for the LOW and HIGH band. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Tutorial The EQ ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s EQ on or off. If the button is off, press the [ENTER] button to turn it on. 36 Tutorial • F (Frequency) This parameter control specifies the center frequency for cut/boost, with a setting range of 21.2 Hz to 20.0 kHz. • G (Gain) This parameter control specifies the cut/boost amount in the range of –18.0 dB to +18.0 dB. The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on/off controls when Q is set to HPF and LPF respectively. You can also press the buttons ([HIGH], [HIGH-MID], [LOW-MID], [LOW]) in the SELECTED CHANNEL section to select the desired band and use the rotary controls ([Q], [FREQUENCY], [GAIN]) to directly edit the Q, F, and G parameters. Using the EQ Library EQ settings can be recalled from the EQ library. EQ library memory numbers 1–40 contain preset EQ settings (programs) suitable for commonly-used instruments, allowing you to work efficiently. 1. Press the LAYER [1–16] button. Input Channel Layer 1–16 is now available for control from the channel strip section. 2. Press the [SEL] button for the Input Channel to which you want to apply EQ. 3. Press the [EQ] button, then the [F2] button to display the EQ | EQ Library page. 4. Rotate the Parameter wheel to scroll the Q HIGH HIGH-MID FREQUENCY library title list, and select a program that you want to recall. The selected program appears inside the dotted box. LOW-MID GAIN LOW Tip: • Turn the Q parameter control for the LOW band clockwise all the way to set the LOW-band EQ to “L. SHELF” (low-shelving), and counter-clockwise all the way to set it to “HPF” (high-pass filter). • Turn the Q parameter control for the HIGH band clockwise all the way to set the HIGH-band EQ to “H. SHELF” (high-shelving), and counter-clockwise all the way to set it to “LPF” (low-pass filter). • By default, the LOW band is set to “L. SHELF,” and the HIGH band is set to “H. SHELF.” 6. In the same way, adjust the EQ for the other channels. Tip: The meters in the upper-right corner of the page indicate the post-EQ signal levels of the currently-selected Input Channel. If these meters reach the “OVER” position, lower the pre-EQ signal level using the ATT. parameter control located in the upper-left on the page. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 5. Move the cursor to the RECALL button located to the left of the library title list, then press [ENTER]. The selected program is recalled. 6. Press the [F1] button to display the EQ | EQ Edit page. Adjust the parameters as desired. Compressing the Input Signals Compressing the Input Signals The 01V96i’s Input Channels 1–32 feature individual channel compressors. A compressor is an effect used to make the volume level more consistent, or to restrain the maximum level in order to raise the overall volume. Here we describe how to use a compressor to process an input signal. 37 6. Press the [F3] button. The 01V96i displays the Dynamics | Comp Edit page, which enables you to adjust compressor parameters. 1. Press the LAYER [1–16] button. Input Channel Layer 1–16 is now available for control from the channel strip section. 2. Press the [SEL] button of the Input Channel to which you want to apply compression. 3. Press the [DYNAMICS] button, then press the [F4] button. The Dynamics | Comp Lib page appears. This page enables you to store compressor settings (programs) to the Compressor library, and recall compressor programs from the library. This example uses one of the compressor programs 1–36 from the Compressor library. 4. Rotate the Parameter wheel to scroll the library title list, and select a program that you want to recall. The selected program appears inside the dotted box. 5. Move the cursor to the RECALL button The selected program is recalled. 7. Press the [ENTER] button to turn on the ON/OFF button located in the lower-left corner of the page. The ON/OFF button turns the currently-selected Input Channel’s compressor on or off. 8. While sound is being produced on the instrument or other device, adjust the parameters of the compressor. To do so, move the cursor to the desired parameter in the PARAMETER section on the page, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons. Input Channels 1–32 feature a gate that can be used independently of the compressor. To use the gate, first press the [DYNAMICS] button, then the [F2] button to access the Gate library. After you recall a gate program, press the [Dynamics] button, then the [F1] button to display the Gate Edit page, which enables you to adjust gate parameters. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Tutorial located to the left of the library title list, then press [ENTER]. Tip: • The 01V96i features four types of dynamics processors: COMP (Compressor), EXPAND (Expander), COMP. (S) (Compander Soft), and COMP. (H) (Compander Hard). These processors feature different parameters. (See the Reference Manual for the parameters for each compressor type.) • You cannot change the compressor type on the Comp Edit page. To change the compressor type, recall a program that uses the desired compressor type from the Compressor library, then adjust the parameters as desired. 38 Tutorial Using the Internal Effects The 01V96i features four internal multi-effects processors that can be used via Aux Sends and Returns or by inserting them into specific channels. This section describes how to use internal Effects processor 1 via Aux Send 1, and apply reverb to the track signals. 3. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the Effect | FX1 Lib page appears. 1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | Effect page appears. This page enables you to patch the inputs and outputs of Effects processors 1–4. By default, Aux Send 1 is patched to the input of Effects processor 1, and the output of Effects processor 1 is patched to ST IN Channel 1 L and R, as shown in the diagram above. The Effect | FX1 Lib page enables you to recall effect programs to be used by Effects processor 1 from the Effects library, and store the current effects settings of Effects processor 1 to the Effects library. Select from the list in the center column a program memory to which you wish to store the effects settings, or a program memory that you wish to recall. The selected program appears inside the dotted box. 4. Rotate the Parameter wheel and select “2. Reverb Room” Here we’ll use room reverb as an example. Tip: If the patch for internal Effects processor 1 is different from the above, use the Parameter wheel or [INC]/[DEC] buttons, and the [ENTER] button to change the patch. 2. Make sure that the [ON] button for ST IN Channel 1 in the ST IN section is turned on. 5. Move the cursor to the RECALL button located to the left of the list, then press [ENTER]. Effect program “Reverb Room” is loaded into Effects processor 1. 6. press the [EFFECT] button repeatedly until the Effect | FX1 Edit page appears. Adjust the parameters as desired. 7. Press the LAYER [1–16] button. Input Channel Layer 1–16 is selected for control from the channel strip section. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Recording to DAW Software via the USB Port 8. Press the FADER MODE [AUX1] button. The button indicator lights up. While the [AUX 1]–[AUX 8] button indicators are lit, faders 1–16 control the Aux 1–8 send levels. In this example, the faders control the send level of the signals routed from Input Channels 1–16 to Aux 1 (Effects processor 1 input). Tip: To reset the fader 1–16 function to normal mode, press the FADER MODE [HOME] button. 9. While sound is being produced on the instrument or other device, use faders 1–16 to adjust the send level of the signal sent from each Input Channel to Effect 1. 39 Recording to DAW Software via the USB Port This chapter explains how the signals being input to the 01V96i can be sent via USB and be recorded into DAW software running on your computer. Note: You must have installed the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver on your computer. The Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver can be downloaded from the following website. For details on installation, refer to the installation guide included in the download file. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ There are two methods of recording via the USB port into DAW software on your computer. 10. To adjust the effect return level, use the rotary level control located on the left side of the ST IN section on the top panel. You can view the current level in the upper-right corner of the display. Recording Bus Outs 1–8 In this method, the Input Channel signals are first sent to buses 1–8 and then routed to Bus Outs 1–8 and sent to USB OUT. Use this method if you want to mix the signals of multiple Input Channels and stereo-record them. If necessary, you can use the compressors and EQ of Bus Outs 1–8 to process the signals. Here’s the procedure for recording Bus Outs 1/2 via USB to a stereo track of your DAW. Tip: The Input Channels that you want to record must be assigned to Bus Outs 1/2. For details on how to do this, refer to “Setting the Routing” on page 33. 1. Use a USB cable to connect your computer to the 01V96i. ton repeatedly until the Patch | USB Out page appears. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Tutorial 2. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] but- 40 Tutorial 3. Make sure that USB1 is assigned to BUS1, and USB2 is assigned to BUS2. If the settings are otherwise, use the Parameter wheel (or [INC]/[DEC]) and [ENTER] to change the settings. 4. Start up your DAW, and set it to use the 2. Move the cursor to the parameter box for the Input Channels you want to route to Direct Outs, then specify the output connectors or channels. Move the cursor to the parameter box, and use the Parameter wheel (or [INC]/[DEC] to specify the patching. Assign 1–16 to USB1–USB16. Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver. If you’re using the Cubase AI, set the following items. • From the menu bar, choose “Devices” → “Device Settings,” then click VST Audio System. As the ASIO driver, choose “Yamaha Steinberg USB ASIO” (Windows) / “Yamaha 01V96i” (Mac). • From the “Device” menu, choose “VST Connections.” In the Input tab choose [Add Bus], set “Configuration” to Stereo and “Number” to 1, and click [OK] to create a new stereo input. For the newly created “Stereo In,” set the device port to “01V96i 1/2” (Windows) / “01V96i 1” and “01V96i 2” (Mac). For details on other DAW settings, refer to the owner’s manual of your DAW. 5. Create a stereo track in your DAW. 6. Select 01V96i 1/2 as the input port of the stereo track. If you’re using Cubase AI, select the name of the input port that you created in step 4 (by default this will be “Stereo In”). 7. Enable recording for the track that you want to record, and start recording. 8. When you’ve finished recording, stop the 3. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly until the Pan/Route | Rout1-16 page appears. Signals of the Input Channels whose D button is turned on will be sent directly to the USB OUT that you specified in step 2. 4. Start up your DAW, and set it to use the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver. If you’re using the Cubase AI, set the following items. • From the menu bar, choose “Devices” → “Device Settings,” then click VST Audio System. As the ASIO driver, choose “Yamaha Steinberg USB ASIO” (Windows) / “Yamaha 01V96i” (Mac). • From the “Device” menu, choose “VST Connections.” In the Input tab, choose [Add Bus], set “Configuration” to Mono and “Number” to 16, and click [OK] to create sixteen new monaural inputs. For each newly created “Mono In 1–16,” set the device port to “01V96i 1–16” respectively. For details on other DAW settings, refer to the owner’s manual of your DAW. 5. Create a stereo track in your DAW. DAW. 6. Select 01V96i 1–16 respectively as the input port for each monaural track. Recording Direct Outputs In this method, each Input Channel is recorded directly to your DAW. Use this method if you want to record the signals of multiple Input Channels each to their own track. This is convenient when you’re making a live recording that you will be mixing later. Here we’ll explain the procedure for recording Input Channels 1–16 directly to DAW tracks 1–16. 1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | Direct Out page appears. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual If you’re using Cubase AI, select the name of the input ports you created in step 4 (by default these will be Mono In 1–16). 7. Enable recording for all of the tracks that you want to record, and start recording. 8. When you’ve finished recording, stop the DAW. Adjusting the Monitor Levels from the DAW Adjusting the Monitor Levels from the DAW 41 4. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | In Patch page appears. The audio being played back from the DAW can be returned to the 01V96i’s Input Channels and monitored via the MONITOR OUT jacks or PHONES jack. Normally, the signal of the DAW’s stereo bus is sent to an 01V96i Input Channel for monitoring. However when overdubbing, you might need to monitor with a balance that’s different than the mix balance of the song. In this situation, the signal from each DAW track can be returned to a separate Input Channel, and the balance adjusted on the 01V96i. Here we’ll explain the procedure for sending the signals of DAW tracks 1–8 to the 01V96i’s Input Channels 17–24 and adjusting the monitor levels. 1. Use a USB cable to connect your computer to the 01V96i. 2. Start up your DAW, and set it to use the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver. If you’re using the Cubase AI, set the following items. • From the menu bar, choose “Devices” → “Device Settings,” then click VST Audio System. As the ASIO driver, choose “Yamaha Steinberg USB ASIO” (Windows) / “Yamaha 01V96i” (Mac). • From the “Device” menu, choose “VST Connections.” In the Input tab, choose [Add Bus], set “Configuration” to Mono and “Number” to 8, and click [OK] to create sixteen new monaural inputs. For each newly created “Mono Out 1–8,” set the device port to “01V96i 1–8” respectively. 5. Move the cursor to INPUT 17–24, and use the Parameter wheel (or [INC]/[DEC]) to select USB IN 1–8 respectively. 6. Press the LAYER [17–32] button. Input Channel Layer 17–32 is selected for control from the channel strip section. 7. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAN/ROUTING] button repeatedly until the Pan/Route | Rout17-STI page appears. Tutorial For details on other DAW settings, refer to the owner’s manual of your DAW. 3. In the DAW, select “01V96i 1–8” respectively as the output port of tracks 1–8. If you’re using Cubase AI, select the name of the output ports you created in step 2 (by default these will be Mono Out 1–8). 8. For each Input Channel 17–24, make sure that the S button is on and the 1–8 buttons are off, and use the PAN section to adjust the panning of the monitor signals as necessary. Tip: Controlling Input Channel 17–32 Pan settings, faders, and the [ON] buttons will affect the monitoring signal, but will not affect the signal recorded to the DAW. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 42 Tutorial 9. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [HOME] button, then press the [F1] button to display the Meter | CH1-32 page. 10. Make sure that [ON] button indicators 1–8 are steadily lit, then raise the [STEREO] fader to 0 dB. Using Scene Memories Scene memories enable you to name and store snapshots of the 01V96i’s mix parameters, internal effect processor settings, remote layers, and input/output patch settings. You can store 99 Scene memories, and recall any Scene by using the display pages or the controls on the top panel. Here’s how to use the top panel keys to recall a Scene. 1. Adjust the mix parameters on the 01V96i to the conditions you wish to store as a Scene. 2. Press the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] or Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene memory number. 11. Play back the DAW, and adjust faders 1–8, [MONITOR OUT], and [PHONES] to set an appropriate level for the monitor signals. Now you can monitor via the monitoring system and headphones the signals sent from Input Channels 17–24 to the Stereo Bus. Tip: If the L & R level meters reach the “OVER” position, lower the [STEREO] fader. If you select a Scene memory other than the currently-recalled Scene, its number flashes at the to of the display. Scene memories #U (“Ud”) and #0 (“00”) are special read-only memories, to which you cannot store Scenes. Also, you cannot store Scenes to write-protected Scene memories. 3. Press the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button. The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to name the Scene to be stored. 4. Enter the title, move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit window closes and the current Scene is stored to the selected Scene memory. 5. To recall a Scene, press the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] or Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene memory number, then press the SCENE MEMORY [RECALL] button. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Changing the Channel Names 4. Edit the name, move the cursor to the OK Changing the Channel Names button, then press [ENTER]. The new name is now effective. You can change the default name of the input channels (Input Channels 1–32, ST IN Channels 1–4) and output channels (Aux Outs 1–8, Bus Outs 1–8, Stereo Out), if you desire. Changing the Input Channel Names 1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch| In Name page appears. 1 3 43 2 Tip: The edited name is stored in the Input Patch library. When the Name Input Auto Copy check box (3) is on, the first four characters of a newly-entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name. On the other hand, a newly-entered Short name is automatically added to the beginning of the Long name. You can reset all port names to their default names by moving the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then pressing [ENTER]. Changing the Output Channel Names To change output channel names, press the DISPLAY ACCESS [PATCH] button repeatedly until the Patch | Out Name page appears. 2. Move the cursor to the desired parameter box, then use the Parameter wheel or the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a port for which you want to change the name. The procedure for editing the names and using the Name Input Auto Copy check box and the INITIALIZE button is the same as on the In Name page. 3. Press [ENTER]. The Title Edit window appears, which enables you to edit the name. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Tutorial Channel IDs, Short names, and Long names are listed from left to right on the page. You can specify Short names in the parameter boxes (1) in the center column, and Long names in the parameter boxes (2) in the right column. 44 Tutorial Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User Assignable Layer) If you set the Remote Layer target to “USER ASSIGNABLE,” you can create a custom layer by combining any 01V96i channels (excluding the Stereo Out). This custom layer is called “User Assignable layer.” 1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO/SETUP] button repeatedly until the DIO/Setup| Remote page appears. 2. Set the TARGET parameter to USER ASSIGNABLE, then press [ENTER]. A confirmation window appears. 3. Move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]. The 01V96i displays the page shown below. 1 4. Select the channels you wish to assign to the User Assignable layer using the 1–16 parameter boxes (1). You can store up to four 16-channel setups in four banks by switching Banks 1–4 via the BANK 1–4 buttons. If you press[ENTER] before selecting the channels to assign, you will still be able to select the channels you wish to assign in the User CH Select window. Tip: You can reset the assignment to default by moving the cursor to the CLEAR button and pressing [ENTER]. 5. Use the LAYER [REMOTE] button to assign or recall the User Assignable layer. You can use the faders and [ON] buttons to control the assigned channels. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Using the Oscillator Using the Oscillator The 01V96i features an Oscillator you can use for sound checks. Follow the steps below to use the Oscillator: 1. Press the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button repeatedly until the Utility | Oscillator page appears. 1 3 45 4. Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section, then rotate the Parameter wheel to set the Oscillator level to minimum. Note: Sinewave and pink noise create unusually high sound pressure. Oscillator levels that are too high can damage the speakers. When you use the Oscillator, be sure to set the level to minimum, then raise the level gradually. 5. Move the cursor to the OSCILLATOR ON/OFF button, then press the [ENTER] or [INC]/[DEC] buttons to turn on the Oscillator. The Oscillator signal is now routed to the channels selected in the ASSIGN section. 6. Move the cursor to the parameter control in the LEVEL section, then rotate the Parameter wheel to raise the Oscillator level. You can view the current Oscillator level on the LEVEL meter. 2 4 This page contains the following parameters: 1 OSCILLATOR ON This parameter button turns the Oscillator on or off. 2 WAVEFORM These parameter buttons select the Oscillator waveforms. Tutorial 3 LEVEL section The parameter control in this section sets the Oscillator output level. 4 ASSIGN section The buttons in this section select the Oscillator output. 2. Move the cursor to the button for the Oscillator output channel in the ASSIGN section, then press [ENTER] (you can select multiple channels). 3. Move the cursor to one of the WAVEFORM parameter buttons, then press [ENTER]. • • • • • You can select the following waveforms: SINE 100Hz ........100 Hz sinewave SINE 1kHz...........1 kHz sinewave SINE 10kHz ........10 kHz sinewave PINK NOISE ......Pink noise BURST NOISE ...Burst noise (200 msec pink noise pulses at four second intervals) 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 46 Tutorial Using the User Defined Keys You can assign any of more than 160 functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS [1]–[8] buttons. If you assign to one of the buttons (or “keys”) a function that is usually executed on the display pages, you can use the assigned button as a shortcut. The Function to User Defined Keys assignments are stored in banks. Each bank accommodates an assignment of all eight buttons. The 01V96i provides eight banks (Banks A–H). Switching banks enables you to change the assignment quickly. Follow the steps below to assign functions to the USER DEFINED KEYS. 2. Move the cursor to the desired BANK parameter button, then press [ENTER]. The corresponding bank is selected, and the functions assigned to the User Defined buttons in that bank are displayed in the 1–8 parameter boxes. Tip: When you select a function that is executed based on specified numbers (for example, a function that recalls a specific Scene or library memory or transmits MIDI messages), an extra parameter box appears on the right, in which you must specify the number. 3. Move the cursor to one of the 1–8 parameter boxes, then press [ENTER]. The 01V96i displays the User Define Select window, which enables you to assign functions to the selected buttons. 1. Press the USER ACCESS [UTILITY] button to locate the Utility | User Def page. 1 3 2 4. Move the cursor to the left column, then rotate the Parameter wheel or press the [INC]/[DEC] buttons to select a function you wish to assign. 4 This page contains the following parameters: 1 INITIALIZE This button resets the contents of all banks to their initial settings. 2 BANK These buttons select the desired banks. 3 TITLE This parameter displays the name of the bank selected by the BANK parameter button. Move the cursor to the TITLE parameter box, then press [ENTER]. The Title Edit window appears, enabling you to enter a name. 4 1–8 These parameter boxes enable you to assign functions to USER DEFINED KEYS [1]–[8]. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual A function is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. See the Reference Manual for a complete list of assignable functions. 5. In the same way, set the center and right column. The items that appear in the center and right columns vary depending on the function selected in Step 4. 6. To close the window, move the cursor to the YES button, then press [ENTER]. When the window closes, the specified function is assigned to the selected User Defined button. To cancel the assignment, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press [ENTER]. 7. If you assigned functions that require numbers (such as recalling a Scene or library memory), move the cursor to the extra parameter box shown on the right and specify the number. 47 Using Operation Lock Tip: The 01V96i’s settings can be saved on the hard disk of your computer by using Studio Manager software. We strongly recommend that you back up important data. Studio Manager can be downloaded from the following website. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Using Operation Lock The 01V96i features an Operation Lock function that prevents unintentional edits and restricts access to panel operation with a password. To use the Operation Lock function, press the [UTILITY] button repeatedly to display the Utility | Lock page. 1 2 3 This page contains the following parameters: 1 OPERATION LOCK This button enables or cancels Operation Lock. When you turn on this button, the Password window appears. Note: If you forget the password, you cannot cancel Operation Lock. Be sure to write down the password. 2 OPERATION LOCK SAFE section This section enables you to select certain controls on the panel to exclude from Operation Lock. To cancel all “safe” buttons simultaneously, move the cursor to the CLEAR ALL button, then press [ENTER]. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Tutorial Enter a four-letter password using the Channel 1–10 [SEL] buttons (Channel 10 [SEL] button enters “0”). (The password characters are represented by asterisks.) Move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to enable Operation Lock. The factory default password is “1234.” To cancel Operation Lock, press [ENTER]. The Password window appears again. Enter the password and select the OK button. Operation Lock is cancelled. 48 Tutorial 3 PASSWORD This button enables you to change the current password. Move the cursor to the PASSWORD button, then press [ENTER]. The Set Password window appears, enabling you to change the password. Initializing You can delete all currently-recorded settings and restore the factory-preset values, and reset the Operation Lock password to its initial setting. Follow the steps below. Note: • If you initialize the 01V96i to the factory-preset values, all Scene, library and other data you stored previously will be erased. Proceed with caution. • If you want to keep the current internal data, be sure to first back up the data using the Studio Manager software. Enter the current password in the PASSWORD field, and a new password in the NEW PASSWORD field. The factory default password is “1234.” Enter the new password again in the REENTRY field located below the NEW PASSWORD field. Move the cursor to the OK button, then press [ENTER] to change the password. Tip: To clear the registered password, move the cursor to the CLEAR button, then press [ENTER]. If you’ve forgotten the password you specified, you can clear the password by initializing the 01V96i to its factory-set state. 1. Make sure that the power to the 01V96i is turned off. 2. While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button, turn on the POWER ON/OFF switch. After a moment, the 01V96i displays the following confirmation window. 3. To reset the 01V96i to factory default settings, move the cursor to the INITIALIZE button, then press [ENTER]. To cancel the initialization operation, move the cursor to the CANCEL button, then press [ENTER]. When the internal data is thoroughly overwritten, the 01V96i restarts using the factory settings. 4. To reset the Operation Lock password to its initial setting, in Step 2, move the cursor to the PASSWORD button, then press [ENTER]. The password is reset to “1234.” If you do not take any action after the confirmation window appears, the window automatically closes and the 01V96i restarts without being initialized. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting 49 Troubleshooting ❍ Are the LCD contrast and panel brightness set appropriately? ❍ Is the POWER switch turned on? ❍ If the power still does not turn on, contact a Yamaha service center listed at the end of the manual. Sound is not input ❍ Is the optional I/O card inserted correctly? (see page 18) ❍ Is the signal from the external device being input? ❍ Is the input port patched to an input channel? (see page 29) ❍ Is the GAIN set to an appropriate level? (see page 32) ❍ Is the EQ attenuator raised? (see page 35) ❍ Is an insert turned on even though it is not assigned correctly? ❍ Is the input channel’s [ON] key indicator lit? ❍ Is the input channel’s fader raised? Sound is not output ❍ Is the optional I/O card inserted correctly? (see page 18) ❍ Is the STEREO channel’s [ON] key indicator lit? ❍ Is the output channel patched to an output port? (see page 31) Sound is not output from headphones or MONITOR OUT jacks ❍ Is the [PHONES] knob or [LEVEL] knob set to an appropriate volume? Insufficient volume ❍ Is the GAIN set to an appropriate level? (see page 32) ❍ Is the input channel’s fader raised? ❍ Could the EQ gain be lowered excessively? (see page 35) ❍ Could the GATE/COMP threshold or ratio be set to an excessive value? (see page 37) ❍ Is the EQ attenuator raised? (see page 35) ❍ Is the output channel’s fader raised? ❍ Check the levels in each screen of the METER function. (see page 23) Sound is distorted ❍ Is the wordclock set correctly? (see page 27) ❍ Is the GAIN set to an appropriate level? (see page 32) ❍ Could the input channel’s fader be raised excessively? ❍ Could the STEREO channel’s fader be raised excessively? ❍ Could the EQ or COMP gain be raised excessively? (see pages 35–37) Sound is output even though not patched to an output channel ❍ Could the input channel be set to direct out? (see page 33) ❍ Could insert out be assigned to the output channel? Operating a fader does not change the level as expected ❍ Are the correct channels selected in the LAYER section? Only a specific channel is heard from the MONITOR OUT or PHONES jack ❍ Could the [CUE] key be on? Noise is present in an externally connected recorder or device ❍ Is the wordclock set correctly? (see page 27) ❍ Could an unsynchronized signal be input? ❍ Is the oscillator turned on? (see page 45) High-frequency range is lacking ❍ Could emphasis be applied? This will occur if the state of the input signal does not match the emphasis data. ❍ Could EQ be applied? (see page 35) An input signal is being input, but there’s no monitor output ❍ Could DIMMER be applied? ❍ Is the routing appropriate for the signal you want to monitor? Headroom is restricted, particularly when EQ boost is applied ❍ Use the EQ’s attenuator to reduce the level. (see page 35) Signal is delayed ❍ Check whether the delay of each channel is set correctly. Can’t save scene memories or library data ❍ Could you be attempting to save a read-only scene/library memory, or a protected scene? (see page 42) Can’t transmit/receive MIDI data ❍ Is the MIDI PORT selected correctly? ❍ Are the MODE and channel selected correctly on the transmitting and receiving devices? ❍ Have you assigned an event to the program change? When a scene is recalled, some channels/parameters do not update ❍ Could recall safe be specified for those channels/parameters? When a scene is recalled, it takes time for the faders to stop ❍ Could a fade time have been specified? 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Troubleshooting Power won’t turn on, panel LEDs or LCD won’t light 50 Troubleshooting Signal level is low at a specific frequency ❍ Could the EQ gain be excessively low? ❍ Routing a signal through GEQ or an effect will delay it relative to other signals. If a signal is mixed with the same signal routed differently, a comb filter effect will decrease the level at specific frequencies. Can’t control the 01V96i console from 01V96i Editor ❍ Refer to the 01V96i Editor installation guide on the website. The 01V96i console is not recognized by your DAW software ❍ Have you downloaded and installed the Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver? ❍ You must connect the 01V96i to the computer and power-on the 01V96i before you start up your DAW software. ❍ Check the driver settings and device settings of your DAW software. Signals are not recorded on your DAW software ❍ Are the input ports set appropriately on your DAW software? ❍ If you’re using Cubase, are the VST connection settings appropriate? ❍ Is the signal you want to record being routed to one of USB1–16? 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Error messages 51 Error messages Message Summary Memory backup issues Check Sum Error! Check sum did not match between shutdown and startup. A memory backup problem has occurred, perhaps because the battery is low. Low Battery! The backup battery has run low. Replace the battery. Low Battery ! Replace Battery ! The battery is low. Replace the battery. Low Battery ! Factory Preset ? Replace Battery ! The battery is low. Replace the battery. Battery is Exhausted ! Replace Battery ! The battery is dead. Replace the battery. Communication issues This will appear if you attempt to execute a bulk dump with the MIDI PORT unspecified. Port busy. Try again. Port Busy occurred while executing a MIDI bulk dump. Try the operation once again. TX buffer full. Try again. TX Buffer Full occurred while executing a MIDI bulk dump. Try the operation once again. Work Memory full! Memory could not be allocated for the MIDI bulk dump. MIDI Framing Error There was a framing error in the message received at the MIDI port. Check whether an appropriate device is connected. MIDI Overrun Error There was an overrun error in the message received at the MIDI port. Check whether an appropriate device is connected. MIDI Parity Error There was a parity error in the message received at the MIDI port. Check whether an appropriate device is connected. MIDI RxBuf. Full The MIDI port reception buffer has overflowed. Cause: The amount of data being received is too great, or the system has been loaded for an extended period of time. MIDI TxBuf. Full The MIDI port transmission buffer has overflowed. Cause: The amount of data being transmitted is too great, or the system has been loaded for an extended period of time. SLOT1 Framing Error There was a framing error in the message received at the SLOT1 serial port. Check the serial bridge settings of the MY card. SLOT1 Overrun Error There was an overrun error in the message received at the SLOT1 serial port. Check the serial bridge settings of the MY card. SLOT1 Parity Error There was a parity error in the message received at the SLOT1 serial port. Check the serial bridge settings of the MY card. SLOT1 RxBuf. Full The SLOT1 serial port reception buffer has overflowed. Cause: The amount of data being received was too great, or the system has been loaded for an extended period of time. SLOT1 TxBuf. Full The SLOT1 serial port transmission buffer has overflowed. Cause: The amount of data being transmitted was too great, or the system has been loaded for an extended period of time. USB RxBuf. Full The USB port reception buffer has overflowed. Cause: The amount of data being received was too great, or the system has been loaded for an extended period of time. USB TxBuf. Full The USB port transmission buffer has overflowed. Cause: The application on the communicating PC terminated abnormally, etc. Disconnect and reconnect the cable, and restart the application. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Error messages MIDI port is not selected! 52 Error messages Message Summary DIO issues WRONG WORD CLOCK! The wordclock is incorrect. Cause: The device assigned as the clock source is not running, or a clock source to which the 01V96i cannot synchronize has been selected. Sync Error!(SLOT) Synchronization has not been achieved with the input signal from the MY slot. Check the clock source of the connected device. Sync Error!(2TRD) Synchronization has not been achieved with the 2TR Digital input signal. Check the clock source of the connected device. Sync Error!(ADAT IN) Synchronization has not been achieved with the ADAT IN input signal. Check the clock source of the connected device. Memory store/recall issues Y56K Couldn’t Store #xx : SLOT(1). The Y56K/Y96K’s scene #xx could not be stored. Cause: You selected scene 97 or later. Y56K Couldn’t Recall #xx : SLOT(1). The Y56K/Y96K’s scene #xx could not be recalled. Cause: The scene had not been stored in the Y56K/Y96K, or you selected scene 97 or later. Channel Library #xx Can’t Recall! This message appears if you attempt to recall a channel library memory that was created from a different channel module. For example, this will appear if a library memory created for an Aux channel is recalled to an Input channel. Nothing to Undo! Undo is not possible because there is no data in the undo buffer. This message will appear if you attempt to recall the undo buffer (#U) without having executed Store or Recall since the console was powered-on. Nothing to Paste. The copy buffer is empty. This message will appear if you attempt to execute Channel Paste before executing Channel Copy. Can’t Paste to a Different Channel Type. You cannot Paste because the channel module is different. For example, this message will appear if you copy INPUT Channel 1 and attempt to paste it to AUX1. For Effect 1,2 Only. This effect type can be used only with EFFECT 1 and 2. This message will appear if you attempt to recall HQ.PITCH or FREEZE to EFFECT 3 or 4. AUX Pair Status Conflicted! This message will appear if the saved CH Library memory and AUX have different Pair settings. The library memory has been recalled, but the Pair settings for AUX have not been reproduced. Surround Mode Conflicted! This message will appear if the channel library memory and the Surround Mode settings are different. The library memory has been recalled, but the AUX pair settings have not been reproduced. Output Has No Gate! This message will appear if you attempt to recall a Gate library memory to an Output. Stereo In Has No Gate! This message will appear if you attempt to recall a Gate library memory to a Stereo In. Stereo In Has No Comp! This message will appear if you attempt to recall a Comp library memory to a Stereo In. #xx of Scene is Read Only! #xx of Channel Library is Read Only! #xx of Gate Library is Read Only! #xx of Comp Library is Read Only! This message will appear if you attempt to execute an operation such as Store or #xx of EQ Library is Read Only! Title Edit on a read-only memory. #xx of Effects Library is Read Only! #xx of Input Patch Library is Read Only! #xx of Output Patch Library is Read Only! #xx of Scene is Protected! This message will appear if you attempt to execute an operation such as Store or Title Edit on a protected scene. #xx of Scene is Empty! #xx of Channel Library is Empty! #xx of Gate Library is Empty! #xx of Comp Library is Empty! #xx of EQ Library is Empty! #xx of Effects Library is Empty! #xx of Input Patch Library is Empty! #xx of Output Patch Library is Empty! This message will appear if you attempt to recall a scene or library memory in which no data has been saved 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Error messages Message 53 Summary Panel operation Not assigned. This message will appear if you operate a user-defined key to which no function has been assigned. This Key doesn’t Work on Current Layer. This message will appear if you operate a key that is non-functional when using a remote layer whose target setting is ProTools, Nuendo, Cubase, or General DAW. Fader calibration data error! Channel xx,yy,… A data error has occurred for channel xx,yy,… fader calibration. Please execute fader calibration. If this does not solve the problem, please contact a service center. Patch issues Currently Patched from Direct Out! This message will appear if you attempt to change the output patching of an output port that is assigned to Direct Out while using Direct Out. This Routing is Ineffective! Sound will not be output because an invalid Direct Out Patch has been specified. This message will appear if you turn on a Direct Out that is patched to an output port corresponding to the even-numbered channel of a double channel when operating at 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz. Error messages 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 54 Contents of the Reference Manual Contents of the Reference Manual How to Use This Reference Manual ............................................... 1 Contents of the Owner’s Manual (Booklet) .......... 3 Function Tree .......................................................... 4 Control Surface & Rear Panel ................................. 6 Control Surface .................................................................................. 6 Rear Panel ......................................................................................... 10 Analog I/O & Digital I/O ...................................... 12 Analog Inputs & Outputs ............................................................... 12 Digital Inputs & Outputs ................................................................ 13 Converting Sampling Rates of Signals Received at I/O Card Inputs .. 14 Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status .................................... 14 Dithering Digital Outputs .............................................................. 15 Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates ........... 16 Input Channels ...................................................... 17 About Input Channels .................................................................... 17 Setting the Input Channels from the Display .............................. 18 Setting the Input Channels from the Control Surface ............... 25 Pairing Input Channels ................................................................... 26 Naming Input Channels ................................................................. 28 Bus Outs ................................................................ 29 About Stereo Out ............................................................................. 29 Bus Out 1–8 ...................................................................................... 29 Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Display ........ 30 Setting the Stereo Out and Bus Out 1–8 from the Control Surface ............................................................................... 33 Pairing Buses or Aux Sends ........................................................... 33 Attenuating Output Signals ........................................................... 34 Naming the Stereo Out and Bus Outs .......................................... 35 Aux Outs ................................................................ 36 Aux Out 1–8 ..................................................................................... 36 Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Display ......................................... 36 Setting Aux Out 1–8 from the Control Surface ........................... 38 Setting Aux Send Levels .................................................................. 38 Viewing Aux Send Settings for Multiple Channels .................... 40 Panning Aux Sends ......................................................................... 41 Copying Channel Fader Positions to Aux Sends ........................ 42 Input & Output Patching ..................................... 43 Input Patching ................................................................................. 43 Output Patching .............................................................................. 44 Patching Direct Outs ....................................................................... 46 Insert Patching ................................................................................. 47 Monitoring ............................................................ 49 Monitor ............................................................................................. 49 Monitor and Solo Setup .................................................................. 49 Using the Monitor ........................................................................... 50 Using the Solo Function ................................................................. 51 Surround Pan ........................................................ 52 About Surround Pan ....................................................................... 52 Setting Up and Selecting Surround Pan Modes .......................... 53 Surround Panning ........................................................................... 56 Grouping Channels & Linking Parameters .......... 59 Grouping & Linking ........................................................................ 59 Using Fader Groups and Mute Groups ........................................ 59 Using Fader Group Master ............................................................ 61 Using Mute Group Master ............................................................. 62 Linking EQ and Compressor Parameters .................................... 62 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Internal Effects ..................................................... 64 About the Internal Effects .............................................................. 64 Using Effects Processors via Aux Sends ....................................... 64 Inserting the Internal Effects into Channels ................................ 65 Editing Effects .................................................................................. 66 About Add-On Effects .................................................................... 67 About Plug-Ins ................................................................................. 67 Scene Memories ................................................... 68 About Scene Memories ................................................................... 68 What is Stored in a Scene? .............................................................. 68 About Scene Numbers .................................................................... 68 Storing and Recalling Scenes .......................................................... 69 Auto Scene Memory Update .......................................................... 70 Fading Scenes ................................................................................... 71 Recalling Scenes Safely .................................................................... 72 Sorting Scenes ................................................................................... 72 Copying and Pasting a Scene (Global Paste) ............................... 73 Libraries ................................................................ 74 About the Libraries .......................................................................... 74 General Library Operation ............................................................. 74 Using Libraries ................................................................................. 75 Remote Control .................................................... 83 About Remote Function ................................................................. 83 Pro Tools Remote Layer ................................................................. 83 Nuendo/Cubase Remote Layer ...................................................... 93 Other DAW Remote Layer ............................................................. 94 MIDI Remote Layer ......................................................................... 94 Machine Control Function ............................................................. 98 MIDI .................................................................... 100 MIDI & the 01V96i ........................................................................ 100 MIDI Port Setup ............................................................................ 101 Assigning Scenes to Program Changes for Remote Recall ...... 103 Assigning Parameters to Control Changes for Real-time Control .. 104 Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes ............. 106 Transmitting Parameter Settings via MIDI (Bulk Dump) ....... 107 Other Functions ................................................. 109 Setting Preferences ......................................................................... 109 Creating a Custom Layer by Combining Channels (User Assignable Layer) ................................................. 110 Cascading Consoles ....................................................................... 111 Checking the Battery and the System Version .......................... 113 Calibrating the Faders ................................................................... 113 Index ................................................................... 115 Appendix: Parameter Lists .............................. 119 USER DEFINED KEYS ................................................................. 119 USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments ............................. 121 Input Patch Parameters ................................................................ 121 Initial Input Patch Settings ........................................................... 123 Output Patch Parameters ............................................................. 125 Initial Output Patch Settings ........................................................ 127 User Defined Remote Layer Initial Bank Settings ..................... 128 Effects Parameters ......................................................................... 132 Effects and tempo synchronization ............................................. 146 Preset EQ Parameters .................................................................... 147 Preset Gate Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) ...................................... 148 Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) ......................... 149 Dynamics Parameters ................................................................... 151 Appendix: MIDI ............................................... 156 Scene Memory to Program Change Table ................................. 156 Initial Parameter to Control Change Table ............................... 157 MIDI Data Format ......................................................................... 173 MIDI Implementation Chart ........... End of Manual Specifications 55 Specifications General Spec Number of scene memories 99 Internal 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz USB audio Sampling Frequency Double Rate External The others Signal Delay Normal Rate Normal rate: Double rate: 44.1 kHz ±0.1% 48 kHz ±0.1% 88.2 kHz ±0.1% 96 kHz ±0.1% 44.1 kHz-10% to 48 kHz+6% 88.2 kHz-10% to 96 kHz+6% fs=48 kHz Less than 1.6 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT fs=96 kHz Less than 0.8 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT 100 mm motorized  17 Fader +10 to –138, – dB input faders Fader Resolution Total Harmonic Distortion1 (CH INPUT to STEREO OUT) (Input Gain=Min.) Frequency Response (CH INPUT to STEREO OUT) 0 to –138, – dB master faders, stereo fader fs=48 kHz Less than 0.05% 20 Hz–20 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +24 dB into 600 Ω fs=96 kHz Less than 0.05% 20 Hz–40 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +24 dB into 600 Ω fs=48 kHz 20 Hz–20 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω fs=96 kHz 20 Hz–40 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω 110 dB typ. DA Converter (STEREO OUT) Dynamic Range (maximum level to noise level) 105 dB typ. AD+DA (to STEREO OUT) @ fs=48 kHz 105 dB typ. AD+DA (to STEREO OUT) @ fs=96 kHz –128 dB Equivalent Input Noise –86 dB residual output noise. STEREO OUT (STEREO OUT off) 2 Hum & Noise (20 Hz–20 kHz) Rs=150 Ω Input Gain=Max. –86 dB (90 dB S/N) STEREO OUT Input Pad=0 dB (STEREO fader at nominal level and all CH INPUT faders at minimum level) Input Pad=0 dB Input Sensitivity =–60 dB –64 dB (68 dB S/N) STEREO OUT (STEREO fader at nominal level and one CH INPUT fader at nominal level) 74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–12) to STEREO OUT/OMNI (BUS) OUT 40 dB CH INPUT (CH13–16) to STEREO OUT Maximum Voltage Gain 74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–12) to OMNI (AUX) OUT (via pre input fader) 74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–12) to MONITOR OUT (via STEREO BUS) 80 dB adjacent input channels (CH1–12) Crosstalk (@ 1 kHz) Input Gain=Min. 80 dB input to output Phantom switch +48 V DC (each 4ch) Pad switch 0/20 dB attenuation Gain control 44 dB (–60 to –16), detented Peak indicator LED (red) turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping at digital domain Signal indicator LED (green) turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal at digital domain AD converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (fs=88.2, 96 kHz) 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Specifications AD Input (1–12) 80 dB adjacent input channels (CH13–16) 56 Specifications AD Input (13–16) Gain control 30 dB (–26 to +4), detented Peak indicator LED (red) turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping at digital domain Signal indicator LED (green) turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal at digital domain AD converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (fs=88.2, 96 kHz) Input selector CH15/16/2TR IN for CH15/16 Available cards Optional digital interface cards (MY16, MY8, MY4 series) Input patch — Phase Normal/reverse Digital Input (2TR IN DIGITAL, ADAT input) Option Input (SLOT) Gate-type3 On/off Key in: 12 ch Group (1–12, 13–24, 25–32)/AUX1–8 On/off Comp-type4 Key in: self /Stereo Link Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader Attenuator EQ Input Channel CH1–32 –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) 4-band PEQ (TYPE1)5 On/off Delay 0–43400 samples On/off — Fader 100 mm motorized (INPUT/AUX1–8) Aux send Solo On/off AUX1–8; pre fader/post fader On/off Pre fader/after pan Pan 127 positions (Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63) Surround pan 127  127 positions ([Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63] x [Front= 1–63, Center, Rear= 1–63]) LFE level –, –96 dB to +10 dB (256 step) Routing STEREO, BUS1–8, DIRECT OUT Direct out Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader Metering Displayed on LCD Peak hold on/off Input patch (L/R) — Phase (L/R) Normal/reverse Attenuator (L/R) –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) Equalizer 4band PEQ (TYPE1)5 On/off — Fader Aux send Stereo Input Channel CH1–4 Solo INPUT/AUX1–8 send On/off AUX1–8; pre fader/post fader On/off Pre fader/after pan Pan (L/R) 127 positions (Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63) Surround pan (L/R) 127  127 positions ([Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63] x [Front= 1–63, Center, Rear= 1–63]) LFE level (L/R) –, –96 dB to +10 dB (256 step) Routing STEREO, BUS1–8, DIRECT OUT Metering 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 100 mm motorized Displayed on LCD Peak hold on/off General Spec 57 Level 0 to –96 dB (1 dB step) On/off — Waveform Sine 100 Hz, sine 1 kHz, sine 10 kHz, pink noise, burst noise Routing BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO L/R STEREO OUT DA converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz) MONITOR OUT DA converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz) Output patch STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, DIRECT OUT 1–32, INSERT OUT (CH1–32, BUS1–8, AUX1–8, STEREO), CASCADE OUT (BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO, SOLO) DA converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz), 64-times oversampling (@fs=88.2, 96 kHz) OSCILLATOR OMNI OUT 1–4 Dither 2TR OUT DIGITAL Output patch Dither ADAT Output Word length 16, 20, 24-bit STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, DIRECT OUT 1–32, INSERT OUT (CH 1–32, BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO), CASCADE OUT (BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO, SOLO) On/off Word length 16, 20, 24-bit Output patch STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, DIRECT OUT 1–32, INSERT OUT (CH 1–32, BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO), CASCADE OUT (BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO, SOLO) Available card Optional digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series) Dither Option Output (SLOT) Output patch Comp-type4 Attenuator EQ STEREO On/off On/off Word length 16/20/24-bit STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–8, DIRECT OUT 1–32, INSERT OUT (CH 1–32, BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO), CASCADE OUT (BUS 1–8, AUX 1–8, STEREO, SOLO) On/off Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) 4-band PEQ5 On/off On/off — Fader 100 mm motorized Balance 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63) Delay 0–29100 samples Displayed on LCD Metering Peak hold on/off 12-elements x2 LED meters Comp-type4 EQ BUS1–8 Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader Specifications Attenuator On/off –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) 4-band PEQ5 On/off On/off — Fader 100 mm motorized Delay 0–29100 samples Bus to stereo On/off Level (–, –138 dB–0 dB) Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63) Metering Displayed on LCD Peak hold on/off 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 58 Specifications Comp-type4 Attenuator EQ AUX1–8 Power Requirements Dimensions Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) 4-band PEQ5 On/off On/off — Fader 100 mm motorized Delay 0–29100 samples Metering INTERNAL EFFECTS (EFFECT 1–4) On/off Displayed on LCD Peak hold on/off Number of effects [email protected], 48kHz Bypass On/off In/out 2-in, 2-out Effect-in from AUX1–8/INSERT OUT Effect-out to Input patch U.S./Canada 120 V, 60 Hz 90 W Other 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz 90 W (H x D x W) 148 x 548 x 436 mm [email protected], 96kHz Weight (without the included items) 14 kg Operating free-air temperature range 0–35°C Storage temperature range –20 to 60°C Supplied Accessories AC Cable CUBASE AI DOWNLOAD INFORMATION (printed) Owner’s Manual Options Digital interface card (MY16, MY8, MY4 series) RACK MOUNT KIT: RK1 1. Total harmonic distortion is measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 80 kHz. 2. Hum & Noise are measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB/octave attenuation. 3. See “Gate Parameters” on page 59. 4. See “Comp Parameters” on page 60. 5. See “EQ Parameters” on page 59. 01V96i—Owner’s Manual General Spec 59 EQ Parameters LOW/HPF L-MID 0.1–10.0 (41 points) low shelving HPF Q F H-MID 0.1–10.0 (41 points) HIGH /LPF 0.1–10.0 (41 points) high shelving LPF 21.2 Hz–20.0 kHz (1/12 oct step) ±18 dB (0.1 dB step) HPF: on/off G ±18 dB (0.1 dB step) ±18 dB (0.1 dB step) LPF: on/off Gate Parameters Threshold –54 dB–0 dB (0.1 dB step) Range –70 dB–0 dB (1 dB step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz Gate Hold 0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz 0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz 0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Decay 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Threshold –54 dB–0 dB (0.1 dB step) Range –70 dB–0 dB (1 dB step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz Ducking Hold 0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz 0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz 0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Decay 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Specifications 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 60 Specifications Comp Parameters Compressor Threshold –54 dB–0 dB (0.1 dB step) Ratio (x :1) x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20,  (16 points) Out gain 0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step) Knee Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Release 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Expander Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Ratio (x :1) x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20,  (16 points) Out gain 0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step) Knee Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 points) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Release 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Compander H Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Ratio (x :1) x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points) Out gain –18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Width 1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Release 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Compander S Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Ratio (x :1) x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points) Out gain –18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Width 1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Release 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Libraries Effect library Compressor library Gate library EQ library Channel library Input patch library Output patch library 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Presets 56 User memories 72 Presets 36 User memories 92 Presets 4 User memories 124 Presets 40 User memories 160 Presets 2 User memories 127 Presets 1 User memories 32 Presets 1 User memories 32 Analog Input Spec 61 Analog Input Spec Input PAD GAIN Actual Load Impedance For Use With Nominal –60 dB 0 INPUT A/B 1–12 3 kΩ –16 dB 50–600 Ω Mics & 600 Ω Lines Input level Sensitivity1 Nominal Max. before clip –70 dBu (0.245 mV) –60 dBu (0.775 mV) –40 dBu (7.75 mV) –26 dBu (38.8 mV) –16 dBu (123 mV) +4 dBu (1.23 V) –6 dBu (388 mV) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) –36 dBu (12.3 mV) –26 dBu (38.8 mV) –6 dBu (388 mV) –6 dBu (388 mV) +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) 20 –26 dB INPUT 13–16 — 10 kΩ 600 Ω Lines +4 dB Connector A: XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)2 B: Phone jack (TRS) (Balanced)3 Phone jack (TRS) (Balanced)3 CH INSERT IN 1–12 — 10 kΩ 600 Ω Lines –12 dBu (195 mV) –2 dBu (616 mV) +18 dBu (6.16 V) Phone jack (TRS) (Unbalanced)4 2TR IN [L, R] — 10 kΩ 600 Ω Lines –10 dBV (316 mV) –10 dBV (316 mV) +10 dBV (3.16 V) RCA pin jack (Unbalanced) 1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dB (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain. (All faders and level controls are maximum position.) 2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD). 3. Phone jacks are balanced (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND). 4. CH INSERT IN/OUT phone jacks are unbalanced. (Tip=OUTPUT, Ring=INPUT, Sleeve=GND). In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms. For 2TR IN levels, 0 dBV is referenced to 1.00 Vrms. All input AD converters (CH INPUT 1–16) are 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling. (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz) +48 V DC (phantom power) is supplied to CH INPUT (1–12) XLR type connectors. Three PHANTOM +48V switches CH1–4, 5–8, 9–12 turn on the phantom power for inputs 1–4, 5–8, 9–12 respectively. Analog Output Specs Actual Source Impedance For Use With Nominal STEREO OUT [L, R] 75 Ω OMNI OUT 1–4 Output Output level Connector Max. before clip 600 Ω Lines +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)1 150 Ω 10 kΩ Lines +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) Phone jack (TRS) (Balanced)2 MONITOR OUT [L, R] 150 Ω 10 kΩ Lines +4 dBu (1.23 V) +24 dBu (12.28 V) Phone jack (TRS) (Balanced)2 CH INSERT OUT 1–12 600 Ω 10 kΩ Lines –2 dBu (616 mV) +18 dBu (6.16 V) Phone jack (TRS) (Unbalanced)3 2TR OUT [L, R] 600 Ω 10 kΩ Lines –10 dBV (316 mV) +10 dBV (3.16 V) RCA Pin Jack (Unbalanced) PHONES 100 Ω 8 Ω Phones 4 mW 25 mW 40 Ω Phones 12 mW 75 mW 1. 2. 3. 4. Stereo Phone Jack (TRS) (Unbalanced)4 XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD). Phone jacks are balanced (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND). CH INSERT IN/OUT phone jacks are unbalanced. (Tip=OUTPUT, Ring=INPUT, Sleeve=GND). PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND). In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms. 2TR OUT [L, R] levels, 0 dBV is referenced to 1.00 Vrms. All output DA converters are 24-bit, 128-times oversampling. (@fs=44.1, 48 kHz) 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Specifications Nominal 62 Specifications Digital Input Spec Input 2TR IN DIGITAL ADAT IN Format IEC 60958 ADAT 1 Data length Level Connector 24-bit 0.5 Vpp/75 Ω RCA pin jack 24-bit — OPTICAL 1. ALESIS proprietary multichannel optical digital interface format Digital Output Spec Output 2TR OUT DIGITAL ADAT OUT Format Data length Level Connector IEC 609581 Consumer use 24-bit3 0.5V pp/75 Ω RCA pin jack ADAT2 24-bit3 — OPTICAL 1. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL Type: linear PCM Category code: Digital signal mixer Copy prohibit: NO Emphasis: NO Clock accuracy: Level II (1000 ppm) Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration 2. ALESIS proprietary multichannel optical digital interface format 3. Dither: word length 16/20/24 bit 01V96i—Owner’s Manual I/O SLOT Spec 63 I/O SLOT Spec The I/O SLOT accepts a mini YGDAI card. The SLOT has a serial interface. Refer to the Yamaha Pro Audio website for the latest information on mini-YGDAI cards. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Specifications 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 64 Specifications MIDI/USB/WORD CLOCK I/O Spec I/O Port Format Level USB 2.0 — B type USB connector Audio: 16 in/16 out MIDI: 5 ports IN1 MIDI — DIN Connector 5P OUT MIDI — DIN Connector 5P THRU DIN Connector 5P TO HOST USB MIDI WORD CLOCK Connector in Console MIDI — IN — TTL/75 Ω BNC Connector OUT — TTL/75 Ω BNC Connector 1. MIDI IN can use as TIME CODE IN MTC. 350 148 430 (Not included Screw Heads) 436 (Included Screw Heads) Dimensions 101 350 540 548 Unit: mm Specifications and descriptions in this owner’s manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. European Models Inrush Current based on EN 55103-1:2009 5A (on initial switch-on) 5A (after a supply interruption of 5s) Conforms to Environments: E1, E2, E3 and E4 01V96i—Owner’s Manual Options 65 Options Rack Mounting the 01V96i Using RK1 Rack Mount Kit You can rack mount the 01V96i using an optional RK1 Rack Mount Kit. 1. Hold one of the brackets against one side of the 01V96i so that the bracket ear projects to the side, and align three holes on the bracket with the holes on the side of the 01V96i, as shown in the illustration below. 2. Affix the bracket using three screws included in the RK1 package. 3. Attach the other bracket to the other side of the 01V96i in the same way. Options 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 66 Index Index Symbols /INSERT/DELAY button .............. 12 Display ............................................. 13, 19 DISPLAY ACCESS Section ................. 12 Display Interface ................................... 20 Display Pages ......................................... 20 Driver ........................................................ 7 DYNAMICS button ............................. 12 Numerics E 01V96i Editor ...........................................7 1–16/17–32 buttons .............................. 13 1–8 ........................................................... 46 1–8 buttons ............................................ 14 1–8 buttons (Routing) ......................... 34 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL ............ 17 2TR IN/OUT connectors .................... 11 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL ........ 17 EDIT indicator ...................................... 19 EFFECT button ..................................... 13 Effect page .............................................. 24 Effects ...................................................... 38 Effects library ......................................... 38 ENTER button ....................................... 15 Enter titles .............................................. 21 EQ ............................................................ 35 EQ button ............................................... 13 EQ Library .............................................. 36 EXPAND (Expander) ........................... 37 A AD Output Section ............................... 16 AD15/16 selector .................................. 10 ADAT IN/OUT connectors ................ 17 ASSIGN section .................................... 45 ATT. ........................................................ 36 Attaching a cover .....................................9 AUX 1–AUX 8 buttons ....................... 12 Aux Send ................................................ 12 F BANK ...............................................44, 46 Buttons ................................................... 20 F (Frequency) ......................................... 36 F1–F4 buttons ........................................ 13 Factory default password ..................... 47 Factory-preset ........................................ 48 FADER MODE Section ....................... 12 Fader Modes .......................................... 22 Faders ...................................................... 20 Firmware updates ................................... 8 FREQUENCY control .......................... 14 C G B CH1-32 page .......................................... 23 CH1–4 ON/OFF switch ....................... 16 CH5–8 ON/OFF switch ....................... 16 CH9–12 ON/OFF switch .................... 16 Channel faders ...................................... 11 Channel Strip Section .......................... 11 Channels ................................................. 22 CLEAR button ....................................... 15 COMP (Compressor) .......................... 37 Comp Edit page .................................... 37 COMP GR .............................................. 24 Comp Lib page ...................................... 37 COMP. (H) (Compander Hard) ........ 37 COMP. (S) (Compander Soft) ........... 37 Compressing .......................................... 37 Confirmation Messages ....................... 21 Connections and Setup ........................ 25 Consumer format (IEC 60958) .......... 17 Contrast control .................................... 13 Cursor buttons ...................................... 15 D D button (Routing) .............................. 34 Daisy Chain Distribution .................... 27 Data Entry Section ................................ 15 DEC/INC buttons ................................. 15 DEL button ............................................ 21 Digital I/O Section ................................ 17 DIO/SETUP button ............................. 12 Direct Outs ............................................ 33 01V96i—Owner’s Manual G (Gain) .................................................. 36 GAIN control .................................. 10, 14 GATE GR ............................................... 24 H H. SHELF (high-shelving) ................... 36 HIGH button ......................................... 14 HIGH-MID button ............................... 14 HOME button ....................................... 12 HPF (high-pass filter) ........................... 36 I In Name page ......................................... 43 INITIALIZE button ....................... 43, 46 Initializing .............................................. 48 INPUT connectors 13–16 .................... 10 INPUT connectors A/B ....................... 10 Input Patching ....................................... 31 INPUT section ....................................... 23 INS button .............................................. 21 INSERT I/O connectors ....................... 10 L L. SHELF (low-shelving) ...................... 36 LAYER Section ...................................... 13 Layers ...................................................... 21 LEVEL ..................................................... 24 Level controls ......................................... 12 LEVEL section ....................................... 45 Lock page ................................................ 47 Long name ..............................................43 LOW button ...........................................14 LOW-MID button .................................14 M MASTER button ....................................13 Master page .............................................23 Metering ..................................................23 MIDI button ...........................................12 MIDI IN/THRU/OUT ports ...............17 MIDI indicator .......................................19 MIDI/USB Section ................................17 mini-YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) I/O cards ....18 Mixing system ........................................25 MONITOR LEVEL control .................11 Monitor Levels .......................................41 Monitor Out & Headphones Section ..11 MONITOR OUT connectors L/R ......16 Monitor Source selector .......................11 N Name Input Auto Copy check box ....43 O OMNI OUT connectors 1–4 ...............16 ON buttons ...................................... 11, 12 Operating Basics ....................................19 OPERATION LOCK ............................47 Operation Lock ......................................47 OPERATION LOCK SAFE section ...47 Optional Card ........................................18 Oscillator .................................................45 Oscillator page .......................................45 Output Patching ....................................31 OUTPUT section ...................................23 P PAD switches .........................................10 PAIR/GROUP button ...........................12 Pairing .....................................................33 PAN control ...........................................14 PAN/ROUTING button ......................12 Parameter Boxes ....................................20 Parameter wheel ....................................15 PASSWORD ...........................................48 Password window ..................................47 PATCH button ......................................12 Patching Input Channels ...............................29 Output Channels ............................29 PEAK HOLD button ............................24 Peak Hold function ...............................24 PEAK indicators ....................................10 PHANTOM +48V .................................16 PHONES jack .........................................11 PHONES LEVEL control .....................11 Position page ..........................................23 POST FADER ........................................23 POWER ON/OFF switch .....................18 PRE EQ ....................................................23 PRE FADER ...........................................23 Index Q U Q (slope) .................................................35 Q control .................................................14 USB 2.0 port ...........................................17 USB OUT ................................................30 User Assignable Layer ...........................44 User Define Select window ..................46 User Defined Keys .................................46 USER DEFINED KEYS Section ..........14 UTILITY button ....................................12 Utility software .........................................7 R RECALL button .....................................14 Recording system ..................................26 Recording to DAW Software ..............39 REMOTE button ...................................13 Rotary controls ......................................20 Routing ...................................................33 S S button (Routing) ................................34 Sampling rate indicator ........................19 SCENE button .......................................12 Scene Memories .....................................42 SCENE MEMORY Section ..................14 Scene Up / Down buttons .........14 SEL buttons ..................................... 11, 12 SELECTED CHANNEL Section ........14 Selecting Channels ..........................................22 Display Pages ..................................20 Fader Modes ...................................22 Layers ...............................................21 Setting the Input Levels ........................32 SHIFT LOCK button ............................21 Short name .............................................43 Shortcut ...................................................46 SIGNAL indicators ...............................10 SLOT Section .........................................18 SOLO buttons ................................. 11, 12 SOLO indicator .....................................15 SOLO Section .........................................15 SPC button .............................................21 ST IN button ..........................................12 ST IN page ..............................................23 ST IN Section .........................................12 Star Distribution ....................................27 STEREO fader ........................................11 Stereo meters ..........................................13 Stereo Out ...............................................17 STEREO OUT connectors L/R ...........17 Stereo page ..............................................24 STEREO Section ....................................11 STORE button .......................................14 Studio Manager ....................................... 7 Surround mode indicator ....................19 Synchronization status .........................28 Synchronize ............................................27 67 V VIEW button ..........................................13 W WAVEFORM .........................................45 WORD CLOCK IN connector ............17 WORD CLOCK OUT connector .......17 Wordclock ..............................................27 Wordclock master .................................27 Wordclock slave .....................................27 Wordclock Source .................................28 Y Yamaha Steinberg USB Driver ..............7 T Index Tab Scroll ................................................13 TITLE ......................................................46 Title Edit Window ................................21 TO HOST USB port .............................17 01V96i—Owner’s Manual 01V96i Block Diagram 01V96i Level Diagram Analog Analog dBu +24 +20 +10 +4 0 -2 Digital dBFS 0 -10 -20 -30 -10 -40 -20 -50 -30 -60 -40 -70 -50 -80 -60 -90 -70 -100 -80 -110 -90 -120 -100 -130 -110 -140 -120 -150 -130 -160 -140 -170 -150 -180 -160 -190 -170 -200 -180 -210 -190 PAD GAIN INSERT Digital AD INPUT PATCH PHASE Digital GATE INSERT ATT. EQ INSERT COMP DELAY ON LEVEL INSERT PAN BUS Adder INSERT ATT. EQ INSERT COMP MASTER ON MASTER LEVEL INSERT BAL DELAY OUTPUT PATCH Analog Analog DA Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 dBu Max. Input [+24dBu] CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT Digital Clipping Level Max. Output [+24dBu] [+18dBu] Nominal Output [+4dBu] [+4dBu] Nominal Input [-2dBu] STEREO OUT OMNI OUT MONITOR OUT GAIN MIN., PAD ON +24 +20 +10 +4 0 -10 -20 -30 Max. Input [-40dBu] -40 -50 Nominal [-60dBu] Input -60 GAIN MAX., PAD OFF -70 -80 -90 -100 -110 24 25 26 -120 27 28 29 -140 -130 -150 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 [0dBu = 0.775Vrms] [0dBFS = Full Scale] -160 DSP Noise Floor -170 -180 -190 ADDRESS LIST NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Toronto, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: +1-416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Avenue, Buena Park, CA 90620, U.S.A. Tel: +1-714-522-9011 CENTRAL & SOUTH AMERICA MEXICO Yamaha de México, S.A. de C.V. Av. Insurgentes Sur 1647 Piso 9, Col. San José Insurgentes, Delegación Benito Juárez, México, D.F., C.P. 03900, México Tel: +52-55-5804-0600 BRAZIL Yamaha Musical do Brasil Ltda. Rua Fidêncio Ramos, 302 – Cj 52 e 54 – Torre B – Vila Olímpia – CEP 04551-010 – São Paulo/SP, Brazil Tel: +55-11-3704-1377 ARGENTINA Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A., Sucursal Argentina Olga Cossettini 1553, Piso 4 Norte, Madero Este-C1107CEK, Buenos Aires, Argentina Tel: +54-11-4119-7000 PANAMA AND OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES/ CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America, S.A. Edif. Torre Banco General, Piso 7, Urbanización Marbella, Calle 47 y Aquilino de la Guardia, Ciudad de Panamá, República de Panamá Tel: +507-269-5311 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM/IRELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH (UK) Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, U.K. Tel: +44-1908-366700 GERMANY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 NETHERLANDS/BELGIUM/ LUXEMBOURG Yamaha Music Europe Branch Benelux Clarissenhof 5b, 4133 AB Vianen, The Netherlands Tel: +31-347-358040 FRANCE Yamaha Music Europe 7 rue Ambroise Croizat, Zone d'activités de Pariest, 77183 Croissy-Beaubourg, France Tel: +33-1-6461-4000 ITALY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Italy Via Tinelli N.67/69 20855 Gerno di Lesmo (MB), Italy Tel: +39-039-9065-1 SPAIN/PORTUGAL Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Ibérica, Sucursal en España Ctra. de la Coruna km. 17,200, 28231 Las Rozas de Madrid, Spain Tel: +34-91-639-88-88 GREECE Philippos Nakas S.A. The Music House 19th klm. Leof. Lavriou 190 02 Peania – Attiki, Greece Tel: +30-210-6686168 SWEDEN/FINLAND/ICELAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany filial Scandinavia JA Wettergrensgata 1, 400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: +46-31-89-34-00 DENMARK Yamaha Music Denmark, Fillial of Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Tyskland Generatorvej 8C, ST. TH. , 2860 Søborg, Denmark Tel: +45-44-92-49-00 NORWAY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Germany Norwegian Branch Grini Næringspark 1, 1332 Østerås, Norway Tel: +47-6716-7800 RUSSIA Yamaha Music (Russia) LLC. Room 37, entrance 7, bld. 7, Kievskaya street, Moscow, 121059, Russia Tel: +7-495-626-5005 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-3030 AFRICA SWITZERLAND/LIECHTENSTEIN Yamaha Music Europe GmbH, Branch Switzerland in Thalwil Seestrasse 18a, 8800 Thalwil, Switzerland Tel: +41-44-3878080 AUSTRIA/BULGARIA/ CZECH REPUBLIC/HUNGARY/ ROMANIA/SLOVAKIA/SLOVENIA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Branch Austria Schleiergasse 20, 1100 Wien, Austria Tel: +43-1-60203900 POLAND Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Sp.z o.o. Oddział w Polsce ul. Wielicka 52, 02-657 Warszawa, Poland Tel: +48-22-880-08-88 MALTA Olimpus Music Ltd. Valletta Road, Mosta MST9010, Malta Tel: +356-2133-2093 PA48 ASIA Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 Yamaha Music & Electronics (China) Co.,Ltd. 2F, Yunhedasha, 1818 Xinzha-lu, Jingan-qu, Shanghai, China Tel: +86-400-051-7700 INDIA Yamaha Music India Private Limited P-401, JMD Megapolis, Sector-48, Sohna Road, Gurgaon-122018, Haryana, India Tel: +91-124-485-3300 INDONESIA PT. Yamaha Musik Indonesia (Distributor) Yamaha Music Center Bldg. Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: +62-21-520-2577 KOREA Yamaha Music Korea Ltd. 8F, Dongsung Bldg. 21, Teheran-ro 87-gil, Gangnam-gu, Seoul, 06169, Korea Tel: +82-2-3467-3300 MALAYSIA Yamaha Music (Malaysia) Sdn. Bhd. No.8, Jalan Perbandaran, Kelana Jaya, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: +60-3-78030900 SINGAPORE Yamaha Music (Asia) Private Limited Block 202 Hougang Street 21, #02-00, Singapore 530202, Singapore Tel: +65-6740-9200 TAIWAN Yamaha Music & Electronics Taiwan Co.,Ltd. 2F., No.1, Yuandong Rd., Banqiao Dist., New Taipei City 22063, Taiwan (R.O.C.) Tel: +886-2-7741-8888 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 3, 4, 15, 16th Fl., Siam Motors Building, 891/1 Rama 1 Road, Wangmai, Pathumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: +66-2215-2622 VIETNAM Yamaha Music Vietnam Company Limited 15th Floor, Nam A Bank Tower, 201-203 Cach Mang Thang Tam St., Ward 4, Dist.3, Ho Chi Minh City, Vietnam Tel: +84-8-3818-1122 OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation Sales & Marketing Division 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 OCEANIA AUSTRALIA MIDDLE EAST TURKEY Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Merkezi Almanya Türkiye İstanbul Şubesi Maslak Meydan Sodak, Spring Giz Plaza Bagimsiz Böl. No:3, Sariyer Istanbul, Turkey Tel: +90-212-999-8010 CYPRUS THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA Yamaha Music Europe GmbH Siemensstrasse 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, Germany Tel: +49-4101-303-0 Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. Level 1, 99 Queensbridge Street, Southbank, VIC 3006, Australia Tel: +61-3-9693-5111 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN Yamaha Corporation Sales & Marketing Division 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Tel: +81-53-460-2312 OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Gulf FZE JAFZA-16, Office 512, P.O.Box 17328, Jebel Ali FZE, Dubai, UAE Tel: +971-4-801-1500 HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Commercial Audio Business Division 10-1, Nakazawa-cho, Naka-ku, Hamamatsu, Japan 430-8650 Yamaha Pro Audio global website http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Yamaha Downloads http://download.yamaha.com/ Manual Development Group © 2011 Yamaha Corporation Published 05/2017 IPTO-C0 Printed in Japan WZ74200